JP2015150103A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine executing a novel performance arousing interest of not only a player playing a game but also persons locating therearound.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: a game board 4 having a game area 605 in which a game medium is shot by a player's operation; a body frame 3 in which the game board is fittedly stored; and a door frame 5 that is openably/closably supported with respect to the front face of the body frame 3 and has a game window 101, when it is closed, causing the game area of the game board to face a player's side. The game board 4 includes: a main control board 4100 that executes a game control and outputs a control command based on a change in a game state; and a peripheral control board 4010 that executes a performance control on the basis of the control command output from the main control board. The game machine further includes a movable performance generator being movable away from the game machine by the performance control by the peripheral control board 4010.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an effect is performed in accordance with the progress of a game using a game medium.

  Conventionally, in many gaming machines, as the game progresses, an image is displayed on a display device together with sound and light, and various moving accessories are operated in accordance with the displayed image. This gives the player a sense of expectation and achievement and enhances the fun of the game.

  Patent Document 1 discloses a frame body, an opening / closing door that is attached to the frame body so as to be openable / closable, and an advancement position that is provided so as to be capable of advancing / retreating with respect to the opening / closing door. A movable light-emitting device that can take a retracted position stored in the standby unit when retreating, and an electric actuator that transmits the driving force to the movable light-emitting device and drives the movable light-emitting device between the advanced position and the retracted position And a movable light emitting device is provided at the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the open / close door, for example, in the big hit gaming state, the open door is rotated through the shaft member to advance position There is disclosed a gaming machine that is positioned on the front of the gaming machine and lights up.

JP 2013-116186 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a movable light-emitting device as a part of a rendering device is rotatably supported on an opening / closing door via a shaft member. As described above, in recent gaming machines, trial and error have been repeated to create a more spectacular production within the limits of the size of the display device and the game board. While the cost of introducing movable accessories increases, differentiation is becoming difficult.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is not limited to a player who is playing a game, but a game that creates a novel effect that intrigues the surrounding people. The purpose is to provide a machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A main control board for performing game control and outputting a control command based on a change in game state;
In a gaming machine comprising a peripheral control board that performs presentation control based on the control command output from the main control board,

By the production control by the peripheral control board, provided with a movable production actor that moves away from the gaming machine,
It is characterized by that.
Furthermore, the gaming machine has a gaming board having a gaming area into which gaming media are driven by a player's operation,
A body frame in which the game board is fitted and stored;
A door frame having a gaming window that is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the front surface of the main body frame and has a gaming window that faces the player side of the gaming area of the gaming board;

The game board
A main control board for performing game control and outputting a control command based on a change in game state;
A peripheral control board that performs presentation control based on the control command output from the main control board,

By the production control by the peripheral control board, provided with a movable production actor that moves away from the gaming machine,
[Solution 1].

  For example, the movable directing agent moves a radio controlled helicopter from a standby place provided outside the gaming machine, for example, ascends / descends, or turns slightly above the gaming machine in some cases. The movable director is not limited to a radio controlled helicopter, but may be a flying object such as an airplane or a sphere. In addition, the place and the direction from the gaming machine can be any place around the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Solution Means 1], the movable director is movable away from the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, the player can experience an unprecedented novel production, and the interest of the player is greatly enhanced. In addition, there is an increased possibility that surrounding people are interested in the production and the gaming machine is selected.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a game machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a rear view of a gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a perspective view of the game machine which mainly shows the front side of a door frame. It is an enlarged view near the touch panel. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a perspective view which shows each opening / closing drive mechanism in an attacker unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from diagonally in the state which removed the back board of the center accessory. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from diagonally behind in the state which removed the back board of the center accessory. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back front unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front back unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back unit in a back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back unit in a back unit from diagonally back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back unit for every main member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back unit for every main member and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable decoration body of the back back unit in a back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable decoration body unit of the back back unit in a back unit from diagonally back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable decoration body unit for every main member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable decoration body unit for every main member, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is a top view shown in the state where the unit base and slider cover of the upper movable decorative body unit are omitted. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the main body unit in a top movable decoration body unit, and a star unit. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED in an upper movable decoration body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of an upper movable decoration body unit. It is a front view which shows a side movable decoration body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a side movable decoration body unit. It is a rear view in the state which removed the unit base cover and back raising / lowering base of the lower movable decoration body unit. It is the perspective view which looked at FIG. 40 from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a lower movable decoration body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows arrangement | positioning of LED in a lower movable decoration body unit. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the game machine. FIG. 5 is a plan sectional view of the back box body cut along with the peripheral board box. It is a front view which shows the position of the main decoration board | substrates in a game board. It is a front view which shows a motion of the upper movable decoration body unit in a game board. It is a front view which shows a motion of the upper movable decoration body unit following FIG. FIG. 49 is a front view showing the movement of the upper movable decorative body unit subsequent to FIG. 48. It is a front view which shows the motion of the side movable decoration body in a game board. It is a front view which shows a motion of the lower movable decoration body in a game board. FIG. 52 is a front view showing the movement of the lower movable decorative body following FIG. 51. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (B) is a flowchart showing the procedure of interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port passage process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port passage process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is the prior determination table used in the production prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit | judging determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) A hit determination table used in a hit determination process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (B) a first special symbol stop symbol setting executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a symbol determination table used in processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination command reception process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production | presentation control process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the music game reach effect control process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during music game reach production which is one process in the music game reach production control processing performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a table which shows the marker type set to music game reach production, and the effective range of a main button. (A) It is explanatory drawing which shows the effective range of the main button with respect to a marker, (B) It is a time chart which shows the appearance order of the marker classification of FIG. 75, (C) The time chart which shows the appearance order of the marker classification at the time of big hit (D) is a time chart showing the appearance order of marker types at the time of deviating. It is an acquisition point determination table used in the music game reach production control process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a concrete effect image in a liquid crystal display device when a music game reach effect is performed. It is a concrete effect image in a liquid crystal display device when a music game reach effect is performed. It is a table which shows the marker type set to the music game reach production of another embodiment, and the effective range of a main button. It is a table which shows the marker type set to the music game reach production of another embodiment, and the effective range of a main button. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation explanatory effect performed with a liquid crystal display device, before a music game reach production is started. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the non-operation period time-measurement process which peripheral control MPU performs during a music game reach production. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the effect replacement | exchange process which peripheral control MPU performs. (A) is a flowchart of a timer update process executed as one process of a 2 ms steady process (not shown) executed every 2 ms timer interrupt, and (B) is not shown executed every 2 ms timer interrupt. It is a flowchart of the non-execution state cancellation | release process performed as one process of 2ms regular process. It is a block diagram of the peripheral board | substrate which shows the example which arrange | positions RTC in a peripheral board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect selection table used when determining whether a music game reach production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the specific effect determination process which peripheral control MPU performs. (A) is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the production | presentation aspect table determination process which peripheral control MPU performs at the time of power activation, and (B) is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the presentation aspect determination process which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect selection table used when determining an effect in the period until a date or a period satisfies setting conditions. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect aspect selection table used when determining an effect after a date or a period satisfies setting conditions. (A) is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the production | presentation aspect table determination process which peripheral control MPU performs at the time of power activation, and (B) is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the presentation aspect determination process which peripheral control MPU performs. (A) is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the production | presentation aspect table determination process which the periphery control MPU in 2nd Example performs at the time of power activation, (B) is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the effect aspect determination process which the periphery control MPU performs. . (A) is a side view which shows the helicopter as a movable production | presentation actor which concerns on embodiment, (B) is a block diagram of the periphery board | substrate and movable production | presentation actor which concern on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the driving schedule data table in which driving schedule data was memorize | stored in peripheral control ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the installation location and installation state of a movable production | presentation actor in a game arcade. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the production | presentation mode determination process which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the flight effect control process which peripheral control MPU performs.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the whole gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the gaming machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a box frame that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed and the front side is opened. The main body frame 3, the game board 4 having a game area 605 in which a game ball as a game medium is driven and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and the front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 from the player side A door frame 5 pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 is provided. The door frame 5 of the gaming machine 1 stores a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 605 of the gaming board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a gaming ball disposed below the gaming window 101. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 605 of the game board 4, and It has.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and the horizontal width in each horizontal direction is substantially the same. In addition, the vertical width dimension of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 has a gaming area 605 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular gaming window 101 when viewed from the front, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the gaming window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 605 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590 so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 605, but the player inserts a hand into the game area 605 to play the game. The game balls and obstacle nails in the area 605, various winning openings and bonuses cannot be touched.

[Overall frame configuration]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction, and respective frame plates. And four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of 10, 11, 12, and 13 and connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 with the connecting member 14 to form a vertically long rectangular shape ( (Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. Note that an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light metal molds (for example, aluminum alloys) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the gaming machine 1 in the island facility of the gaming hall, etc. While being able to hold the gaming machine 1 easily as a finger hook, it is possible to enhance the design of the appearance.

  The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower support plate 20 and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12. A support bracket 21, a reinforcement bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be opened and closed. A shaft support pin 389 (see FIG. 5) of an upper shaft support bracket 386 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. A support hole provided in a body frame support plate formed in a body frame shaft support 393 of the body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support bracket 393 in the main body frame 3, and then the shaft support pin 389 of the upper shaft support bracket 386 of the main body frame 3 is engaged with the support rod hole 20c. The body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) attached and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 with a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 1) of a locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to each other. The engagement is released and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[Overall structure of the body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a main body frame base 370 having a rectangular game board holding port 371 for holding the game board 4. An upper shaft support bracket 386 and a lower shaft support bracket 391 that are respectively attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the main body frame base 370 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5; A ball hitting device 650 that is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 370 and drives a game ball into the game area 605 of the game board 4, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 370 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300. A prize ball unit 700 for paying out a ball and a play from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 370 and the main body frame 3 is opened. A spherical outlet opening and closing unit 790 to cut off the flow of the sphere, and a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 370, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, etc. Are integrated into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 371 in the main body frame base 370, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 370 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end portion of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 370 will be described. The main body frame base 370 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and is formed so that the front view has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and has a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction. Has been. The main body frame base 370 includes a game board holding port 371 capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part, A U-shaped front end frame portion 372 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 370 when viewed from the front, and is recessed from the front surface of the front end frame portion 372 toward the rear, and from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 to the rear. The protruding door frame protruding piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engagement groove 373 into which an open-side outer bent protrusion 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 370 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 371 to the lower end of the main body frame base 370 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame part 372 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 374 and a peripheral wall portion 375 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 372 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 371. The free end portions (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 372 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 375 so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 370 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 370 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 371 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 374 and has a game board placement part 376 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 376. A positioning protrusion 377 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 600 in the game board 4, and is formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side when viewed from the front in the peripheral wall portion 375. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fastened, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 379 arranged in the left-right direction in a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 375 and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 And. The positioning projection 377 of the main body frame base 370 can be engaged with the out ball discharge groove of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. Yes. Further, the game board locking portion can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. . Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 370 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 374 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 372. The ball striking device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state where the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 374, a foul space 385 extending leftward and downward is formed on the left side of the front view from the upper end of the shot rail 660 in the ball hitting device 650. It is like that. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 385. The game ball descending the foul space 385 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) in the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 370 is formed in a plurality of openings on the left side of the lower rear wall 374 in the front view in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of main body frame bases 370 on the upper side of the opening and on the left and right sides of the front view. And a through hole 380 penetrating the through hole. The opening of the main body frame base 370 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 374 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The 800 main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 370 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 381 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 374 in a front view. The door frame opening switch 382 is attached, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It is like that. Further, the main body frame base 370 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 384 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 382 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support 386 and the lower shaft support 391 will be described. The upper shaft support bracket 386 and the lower shaft support bracket 391 are respectively attached to the bracket mounting portions on the upper left and lower rear ends of the main body frame base 370 using a predetermined screw, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  The upper shaft support metal 386 is attached to the upper metal attachment part of the main body frame base 370 and has a plate-like attachment part 387 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 387. 388, a shaft support pin 389 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 388, and a shaft pin (not shown) of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the shaft support pin 389 when viewed from the front. And a door frame shaft support hole 390 penetrating in the vertical direction, and a stopper that hangs downward from the left end of the front extension portion 388 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. It is equipped with. In the upper shaft support 386, the attachment portion 387, the front extension portion 388, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support bracket 391 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 392 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Main body frame shaft support bracket 393. The door frame shaft bracket 392 in the lower shaft bracket 391 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 370 and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-like front extending portion 392b, a door frame shaft support hole 392c through which a shaft pin (not shown) of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 392b, and the front extending portion And a stopper 392d that is erected upward from the left side end portion of the portion 392b when viewed from the front and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 392 is integrally formed with an attachment portion, a front extension portion 392b, and a stopper 392d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 393 in the lower shaft support bracket 391 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 370 and extends forward and downward from the lower end of the mounting portion. The front extension part 393b which protrudes, and the main body frame axis | shaft support hole penetrated to the up-down direction in front vicinity of the front extension part 393b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 393 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion and a front extension portion 393b by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 391 is in a state in which the mounting portion of the door frame shaft support 392 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft support 393 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension portion 392b and the front extension portion 393b of the main body frame shaft support 393 are attached to the lower metal attachment portion of the main body frame base 370 in a state where they are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  The upper shaft support 386 and the lower shaft support 391 are attached to the main body frame base 370, and the shaft support pin 389 of the upper shaft support 386 and the main body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support 391 are coaxial. The body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 393 in the lower shaft support bracket 391 is fitted to the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension 393b of the main body frame shaft support 393 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 so that the shaft of the upper shaft support 386 is inserted. By inserting the support pin 389 into the support hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed. It is like that.

  Further, the upper shaft support 386 and the lower shaft support 391 are attached to the main body frame base 370, and the door frame shaft support hole 390 of the upper shaft support 386 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support 391. 392c is positioned coaxially with the door frame 5 so that the shaft pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 392c of the door frame shaft support bracket 392 in the lower shaft support bracket 391. The shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 390 of the upper shaft support bracket 386 after the lower shaft support portion is placed on the front extension 392b of the door frame shaft support bracket 392. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this embodiment, the upper shaft pin of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 390 of the upper shaft support fitting 386, the shaft pin is temporarily inserted. Then, the door shaft is supported by sliding the shaft pin upward after the upper shaft support portion of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 388 of the upper shaft support fitting 386 are vertically overlapped with each other. It can be inserted into the hole 390.

[Hitball launcher]
Next, the hit ball launching device 650 will be described. The ball striking device 650 is mounted such that the metal plate launch base 652 is attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 374 of the main body frame base 370, and the rotary drive shaft 654a is projected forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. Firing solenoid 654, a hitting ball 656 fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a predetermined movement path of the tip 658 A firing rail 660 extending diagonally to the upper left when viewed from the front and attached to the front surface of the firing base 652, and a tip 658 at the tip of the hitting ball 656 passes between the firing rail 660 and the top of the firing rail 660. A ball stopper that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time. 662 and a stopper for restricting the ball hitting ball 656 (tip 658) from rotating toward the shooting rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the shooting rail 660 by the ball stopper piece 662 can be hit. 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is not shown in detail, but the rotational drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. . Further, the hitting ball basket 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654, and a gentle arc extending from the fixed portion 656a, and the tip is centered on the rotation drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a hook portion 656b with the hook tip 658 fixed to the tip at a normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the hook portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween, and a stopper portion 656c capable of contacting the stopper 664 It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  When the hitting ball launcher 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 374 of the main body frame base 370, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 374, that is, the game board mounting portion. 376 (the lower side of the game board holding port 371) is located below and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 602 in the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 371. Thus, a foul space 385 extending downward is formed. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball into the game area 605 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 385 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. It has become. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is positioned below the foul space 385. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the region 605 falls in the foul space 385, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the island facility in the hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed, the game balls supplied from the island facility side to the gaming machine 1 are stored, and then paid out to the upper plate 301 of the gaming machine 1 based on a predetermined dispensing instruction. is there. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 370 and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784.

[Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. One end side of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned.

[Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low.

  The tank rail unit 730 is connected to the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 as viewed from the front, A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the rail 731; a ball stop piece 735 that can move forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the outlet; It is equipped with. Two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[Prize ball equipment]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a predetermined width that communicates with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width that is slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage that opens into the left side of the rear view when bent in a substantially square shape and communicates with the lower left side (open side) of the rear side of the distribution space, and the right side of the rear side of the distribution space (Axis support side) A ball passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward and opens at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is meshed with the first gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 and disposed behind the motor support plate, the second gear meshing with the first gear, and the second gear. The third gear that rotates together with the third gear and is disposed in the distribution space, and the dispensing rotator is fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable on the opposite side of the third gear. A rotation detecting board having a plurality of detection slits (three in the present embodiment) formed at intervals, a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage A counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down inside, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752 are held. Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotator includes three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. When the payout rotator rotates, 1 game ball supplied from the supply passage is 1 Each ball is accommodated in the recess, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball removal passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed on the rotation detecting board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are equally formed (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detecting board, and correspond to between the recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The award ball device 740 is configured such that when the payout rotating body is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage is paid out to the award ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation member is operated by a hall clerk or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball removal passage. It can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the rear side outside the gaming machine 1 through a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end. The full branching unit 770 opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end, and the award of the prize ball device 740 is obtained. A prize ball receiving hole for a game ball flowing down the ball passage, a branching space that is arranged below the prize ball receiving hole and extends in the left-right direction, and a game from directly under the prize ball receiving hole in the branching space to the front side A normal path for guiding the ball, a normal ball outlet 774 that releases the game ball flowing through the normal path to the front and opened at the front right end of the front view, and the right side in the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving opening in the branch space A full tank passage that guides the game ball from the raised position to the front side, and a full ball exit 776 that discharges the game ball that has circulated through the full tank passage to the front and opens to the left in front of the normal ball outlet 774. ing.

  In addition, the full tank branching unit 770 includes a ball receiving port that receives a game ball that opens upward at the left end portion of the rear end upper portion when viewed from the front and flows down the ball passage of the prize ball device 740, and a ball receiving portion. A ball passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has circulated through the ball passage is released forward and at the left end of the front view at a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball exit 776 And an open ball outlet.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first ball inlet 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) and communicates with each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540, The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. The ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage in the main body frame base 370 when viewed from the rear, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet is the main body frame of the main body frame base 370. It is to be delivered to the base ball passage.

  When a game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the upper ball ball is raised from the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that can no longer come out to the side of the tray 301 stagnate in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fill up the normal passage upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball receiving port cannot normally enter the passage, and starts moving in the lateral direction in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved in the horizontal direction is full. So as to enter the tongue passage and be supplied from the full bulb exit to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage, and the second bulb outlet of the foul cover unit 540. It has become.

[Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the substrate unit 800 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 370, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the unit base 810, and a power supply board box attached to the rear face of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front. And board unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 that receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 downward from the left and right front in front view, A discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and the front of the discharge passage 842 and the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) is opened forward and upward. A power supply board box holder 840 having a box housing portion that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side and can accommodate the front end of the power board board box 850.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 370 flows through the main body frame base ball passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion and flows down to the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening of the substrate unit base 810. The game ball and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 can be discharged to the lower rear side of the gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. ing.

  The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. A power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The payout control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front, and a box base 861. And a payout control board 4110 attached to the rear surface and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In the present embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  Further, the payout control board box 860 is configured such that the inspection output terminal 860c and the like provided on the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862. The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear face of the board base 871 and fixed with a peripheral panel relay terminal 872 toward the rear, and a board base. A board for lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball attached to the rear surface of 871 and having CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed to the rear, so that peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. And a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the gaming machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the gaming machine 1 is installed, and the CR unit relay terminal 873 is This is for connecting to the CR unit installed adjacent to the gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided in the door frame 5, the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400 and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion formed on the front face of the board unit base 810 so as to face the front side of the main body frame base 370, Wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are covered at the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 370, and Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining rental display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the tray unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. It should be noted that the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display unit 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 are provided. The description will be described later.

  In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each decorative unit 200, 240, 280 and the decorative unit provided in the plate unit 300 or the operation unit 400 and the operation unit 400 arranged on the door frame 5 side. , For relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414, various switches for detecting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side It is. The decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial operation, and the like. The various switches that detect the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, and 7. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the gaming machine mainly showing the front side of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 2, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). A right side decoration unit 200 that is attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the base unit, and a left side decoration unit 240 that is opposed to the right side decoration unit 200 and is attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit. And.

  The door frame 5 is attached to the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the right side of the dish unit 300. An upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and a capacitance type touch panel 480 (contact type input device) which is provided so as to cover the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and has a contact surface capable of detecting the contact state. ), A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit through the tray unit 300 and is used for driving a game ball, and is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit, and a door frame base on the right side of the foul cover unit 540. And Tamaoku unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the scan unit, and a, a glass unit 590 mounted to close the game window 101 in the rear side of the door frame base unit.

[Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit will be described. The door frame base unit has a door frame base main body 110 having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a substantially elliptical shape. An upper bracket 120 that is attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the main body 110 and fixes the upper decoration unit, and a pair of side speakers that are attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110. 130 and a handle bracket that is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 and supports the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and a lower portion of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. And a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1) that is pivotably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) that is disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101; A main control board 410 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191 and provided in a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and a game board 4 described later. A handle relay terminal plate 192 (see FIG. 1) that relays the connection between the handle relay terminal plate 192 and a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 (which is disposed on the opposite side to the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 (on the right side (axial support side) in the left-right direction in the rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body ( 1) and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to a peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. And an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically shown, in the present embodiment, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. In addition, the wiring for electrically connecting the switch, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc., and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. After being bundled together at the right side (axial support side) position, it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin, and is formed in such a manner that the gaming window 101 having a vertically long and substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is offset upward as a whole. Has been. The gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. In addition, a rectangular notch that allows insertion of the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. A speaker mounting portion for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, a right side (open side) end of the front surface disposed at the lower right corner portion in front view and bulging forward The handle mounting portion for tilting the handle bracket to tilt backward, the wiring passage opening through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass through at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion, and the upper side of the handle mounting portion. Thus, a lock hole 116 is formed which is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short forward and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view.

[Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a shaft support attached along the back side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame base body 110. Side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the gaming window 101 of the door frame base body 110 And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the lower side, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  An upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof. Integrated. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft support bracket 386 and a lower shaft support bracket 391 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the main body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, a hook cover 165 that contacts the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 is provided at the lower rear side of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are disengaged, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 will be described. The tray unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are shot through the ball feeding unit. Can be supplied to the device 650.

  The shape of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to protrude forward from the left to the center in a front view, and forward straightly from the center to the right. Protrusively formed. An operation unit attachment portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed at the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a liquid crystal attachment portion 314d for attaching the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion. . The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and for example, when a player presses the portion downward with a hand, the upper plate 314d bends downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the hand on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged by bending the upper plate upper panel 314. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. In addition, when the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 is replaced. In this case, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper plate upper panel 314 and attached to the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 for removing game balls stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302 in response to an operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and a lower dish ball removal button 354. A lower tray ball removal mechanism 350 for removing the game ball stored in the lower tray 302 in accordance with the operation of the lower tray ball through the lower tray ball removal hole 324b, and a CR (not shown) installed adjacent to the gaming machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 for operating the unit.

[Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The operation unit 400 has a dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) that can be rotated by the player and a press operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player. Operation part), and can accept the player's operation according to the gaming state, or the dial operation part 401 can be moved, not only the game ball driving operation to the player It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a press detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

  Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for rotating in reverse.

[Rental unit]
The lending unit includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward. When the ball rental button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. When the ball rental unit 360 pushes the ball rental button 361 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the game machine 1, a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the tray unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the cash balance and prepaid card inserted after the remaining portion of the loaned portion is drawn are returned. .

[Ball transport unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are supplied to the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan 302 by operating the upper pan ball release button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

  The ball feeding unit 580 is an intrusion port in which game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball opening of the door frame base body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball opening that opens below the intrusion opening and is open at the rear, and a box-like shape that closes the rear end of the front cover and opens the front, and penetrates in the front-rear direction The rear cover having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball that has entered from the intrusion port of the front cover to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball removing member that is pivotally supported and has a partitioning portion for partitioning between the entrance and the ball outlet on the rear side of the front cover, and the game balls on the partitioning portion of the ball removing member are hit one by one on the rear cover. Up and down between the front cover and the rear cover before feeding to the supply port 582a And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member accepts one game ball, while when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member accepts it. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, is cylindrical, and has a handle base whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base that is rotatable relative to the handle base. Arranged at the front of the rotary handle main body, the front of the rotary handle main body, the front of the rotary handle main body, the front of the rotary handle fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle, and the front of the rotary handle. A front end cover fixed to the handle base and rotatably supporting the front of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body in cooperation with the handle base.

  In addition, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and the shaft member bearing portion is fitted. A potentiometer 512 that has a detection shaft portion that can be rotated together and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and is fixed to the front surface of the handle base so that the potentiometer 512 is sandwiched between the handle base and A switch support member having a through-hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to the touch switch 516 at a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member; A single-shot button that is pivotally supported with respect to the switch support member and operates the firing stop switch 518. And a handle that is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member and urges the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body to return to the original rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). And a return spring. The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 605 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506. In addition, after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, it is rotated from the original rotational position to the limit rotational position (rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) that is the maximum rotational position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. To do.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor. When the front part 506 of the rotary handle and the rear part of the rotary handle body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotational position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, so that the rotary handle A game ball is driven into the game area 605 with a launch intensity according to the rotation angle of the front of the main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle, that is, the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle. Yes.

[Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit, and is a game area that is discharged from the prize ball unit 700 or shot by the ball hitting device 650. A game ball (foul ball) that has not reached 605 is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base that is open on the front side and has a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover that closes the front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 has a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a first base that communicates with the first sphere inlet and expands to the right in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542. One ball passage, a second ball inlet 542c arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and having a larger opening than the first ball inlet 542a, and communicated with the second ball passage and inside the cover base And a second sphere inlet 542c that extends downward and is inclined toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. In the second ball passage in the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodating space that can be accommodated is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially upper center in the left-right direction and has a foul ball inlet 542e that opens upward, and a foul that communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e and can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage And a ball passage. In addition, the cover base includes an opening / closing operation piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second bulb entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece contacts the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank and opening / closing the shutter 792. It can be in an open state.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base and penetrates in the front-rear direction. An outlet, and a second ball outlet that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper sphere supply port of the tray unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit. Further, the rear end of the lower tray ball supply bowl in the tray unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet through the ball passage opening of the door frame base main body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 transfers the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a from the first ball outlet to the dish unit 300 through the first ball passage. It can supply to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. The plate unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply basket and the lower plate ball supply port.

  Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 385 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball launched by 650 does not reach the game area 605 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 385, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. The foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. It can be done.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage and is pivotally supported on the cover base so as to be able to swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space. A member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that biases the swing member in a non-detection state by the full switch 550.
The swinging member is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base, and the upper end is rotated to the left when viewed from the front. It comes to form. Further, the swing member is biased to a position where the swing member is substantially vertical by a spring. Further, the swinging member is formed with a detection piece projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[Touch panel]
FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the touch panel of FIG. An upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and a touch panel 480 provided so that the operation surface overlaps the display area are provided at a substantially central portion in the width direction of the door frame 5 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3. . In touch panel 480, the contact state on the contact surface of the player's touch panel 480 is detected, the coordinate value of the contact surface of touch panel 480 indicating the center of the contact portion is acquired based on the contact state, and is represented by the coordinate value. The position is specified as a detection point. Further, an operation such as tapping, rubbing, and repelling with respect to the touch panel is discriminated by an internal mechanism (not shown) and acquired as operation information in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG.

  The player's participation in the player participation type effect is performed while driving the game ball into the game area 605, and the player normally operates the handle device 500 with the right hand. Since the left hand, which is not used for the operation of the handle device 500, is usually used, the player's participation is obtained by arranging the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 in the substantially central portion of the door frame 5 in the width direction. It is possible to provide an optimal operating environment for mold production.

  In addition, an operation unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the upper plate 301 on the left side of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480, and a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player. And an operation unit 405, and can accept a player's operation according to the gaming state, move the dial operation unit 401, or perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405. Here, 368 is an auxiliary mark that is provided around the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400 and suggests a place to be operated by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the operation unit 400 is provided on the left side of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 provided in the substantially central portion of the door frame 5 in the width direction, as described above. Although the player's touch panel 480 and operation unit 400 are usually operated with the left hand, the operation unit 400 is easily operated. Further, the operation of the operation unit 400 does not hinder the visual recognition of the display on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. However, the present invention is not limited to the operation unit 400 disposed on the left side of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480. If the player can operate without any trouble, the upper, lower, It may be arranged on the side or the like, and even if it obstructs the display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to some extent, it does not exclude the arrangement on the right side or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400 are arranged at different positions in plan view, but the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 are arranged. It is also possible to arrange the operation unit 400 so as to overlap with the existing location. Such an arrangement makes the player's operation easier because the player's operation range is limited.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the touch panel 480 is provided so that the operation surface overlaps the display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470, but the touch panel 480 does not necessarily overlap the display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470. The touch panel 480 alone may be provided, or the touch panel 480 may be provided on the operation unit 400. When the touch panel 480 is provided on the operation unit 400, it is possible to increase the types operated by the operation unit 400 while facilitating the player's operation while the player's operation range is further limited. Become.

  As shown in FIG. 8, an operation unit light emitting device 490 is provided between the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 and the upper plate 301, and between the upper plate 301 and the game board 4, A dish light emitting device 492 is provided. Furthermore, a touch panel light-emitting device 494 is provided between the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 and the operation unit light-emitting device 490. In the present embodiment, the operation unit light emitting device 490 suggests the operation timing of the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400, and the touch panel 480 is operated by the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel unit light emitting device 494. Notify that the operation is being performed reliably.

  From the relationship that the operation unit light emitting device 490 is located in the vicinity of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480, if the operation unit light emitting device 490 emits light empirically, 400 and the operation unit light emitting device 490 can be recognized to be related to each other. In addition, since the player knows that the touch panel is operated by touching, the fact that the operation unit light emitting device 490 emits light is a timing at which the touch panel 480 or the operation unit 400 can be operated. It becomes.

  Further, the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel light emitting device 494 emit light according to the timing when the player operates the touch panel 480, or emit light according to the type of operation of the touch panel 480 (touch operation, flick operation, etc.). By changing the mode, it can be recognized that the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel light emitting device 494 emit light as a response to the operation of the touch panel 480. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the touch panel 480 is operated.

  The operation of the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400 needs to perform a predetermined operation at a predetermined timing, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 notify the predetermined timing. Since the liquid crystal display device always emits light by the backlight, there is a possibility that even if the notification of the predetermined timing of the operation is performed by light emission or the like, the light emission for notification is not noticed. Further, since the angle of the line of sight with respect to the liquid crystal display device differs depending on the physique and the like, the player may not be able to see the liquid crystal display device depending on the angle and may not notice the notification. Further, since the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 are slightly separated from each other, it may be difficult for the player to view both liquid crystal display devices at the same time. Even if an operation instruction is given on the device, the player may not notice. As in the present embodiment, the player can reliably grasp the operation timing and the operation type of the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400 by performing the suggestion by the light emitting device from the position of the game board 4 to the position of the upper plate 301. Can do.

  As a specific method of suggesting the light emitting device, the operation unit light emitting device 490 can be turned on, and the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel light emitting device 494 can be turned on simultaneously. In addition, it is possible to make an suggestion by blinking instead of lighting, or to make an suggestion by sequentially turning on or blinking the upper plate light emitting device 492, the operation unit light emitting device 490, and the touch panel light emitting device 494, and vice versa. It is. Furthermore, it is also possible to make a suggestion by using a light emitting device capable of emitting multicolor light as each light emitting device, and making the light emission colors the same. In addition, after each light emitting device is turned on or blinking, the display contents of the liquid crystal display device are combined and suggested, such as displaying “Hit!” Or “HIT” on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. It is also possible to do this.

[Overall configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 13. FIG. 9 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front, and FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally left front. Further, FIG. 12 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from the diagonal front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view exploded for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from the diagonal rear. FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the rear.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a player operates a game ball (simply "ball" as a game medium by operating an operation handle portion. A frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game region 605 into which the game region 605 is driven, and a transparent plate-like game panel that is disposed so as to close the game region 605 on the rear side of the front component member 601. 600, a frame-like panel holder 630 that covers the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 and holds the gaming panel 600 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear side of the front component 601; and an out port 606 outside the gaming area 605 A function display unit 640 disposed on the lower side of the front structural member 601 on the right side, and a function display seal 649 attached to the front surface of the function display unit 640. To have.

  The game board 4 is viewed from the player side mainly on the front unit 2000 disposed on the front side of the game panel 600, on the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 600, and on the rear side of the back unit 3000. And a liquid crystal display device 1400 that can be attached and can display a predetermined effect image.

  The front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 is arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 605 and above the out port 606 and supported by the front surface of the gaming panel 600, and the gaming area 605 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A side decoration member 2200 disposed along the outer periphery of the game panel 600 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and a gate member 2300 disposed on the left side slightly above the center in the vertical direction in the game area 605 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2400 that is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 605 and is supported by the game panel 600.

  The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 includes a frame-like back front unit 3000a attached to the rear side of the panel holder 630 and a back rear unit 3000b attached to the rear side of the front front unit 3000a. A liquid crystal display device 1400 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear rear unit 3000b, and the displayed effect image is displayed from the player side through the frame of the rear front unit 3000a and the center accessory 2400. It can be visually recognized.

  The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of the present example is divided into front and rear parts, and is divided into a front back front unit 3000a and a rear back back unit 3000b. The back front unit 3000a in the back unit 3000 includes a back front upper decoration member 3020, a back front left decoration member 3030, and a back front lower decoration that decorate the rear side of the game panel 600 that is transparent outside the center accessory 2400. The member 3040 is mainly provided. The back rear unit 3000b in the back unit 3000 includes an upper movable decorative body unit 3200, a side movable decorative body unit 3400, and a lower movable decorative body unit 3600 disposed on the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the rear side of the game panel 600. It is mainly equipped with. The liquid crystal display device 1400 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box body 3100 constituting the back box 621 in the back back unit 3000b.

  Further, on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the game board 4, as will be described in detail later, to the peripheral substrate box 622 containing the peripheral substrate 4010 including the peripheral control substrate 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4150, and to the liquid crystal display device 1400 And an inverter board box 1410 containing an inverter board 1411 for supplying power.

[Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear.
FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front after disassembling each main member. FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing each opening / closing drive mechanism in the attacker unit.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the front unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed in the lower part of the center of the game panel 600 in the left-right direction, and is placed on the front of the game panel 600. It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged substantially at the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2101, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101, and the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 It has a section-shaped large winning opening 2103 extending greatly in the left-right direction, and a total of four general winning openings 2104 arranged slightly on the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103.

  The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second starting port 2102 disposed below the first starting port 2101 is, as illustrated, a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 2102. Thus, the space between the first start port 2101 is closed, and in the state shown in the figure, the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 2102. The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 are pivotally supported at the lower end side so that the upper end side is rotated in a direction away from each other. Is ready to accept. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2105.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2106 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported at its lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the big prize opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is rotated, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

  The attacker unit 2100 of this example will be described in further detail. As shown in FIG. 18, the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600 and has a first start port 2101 and a big winning port 2103 at the left and right centers. , And a plate-shaped base plate 2110 capable of forming a general winning opening 2104, and a pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the first starting port 2101 in the base plate 2110 and pivotally supported. A center receiving member 2111 having a start port 2102 formed open on the upper and rear sides, and four side receivers attached so as to form a general winning port 2104 at a predetermined position on the front surface of the base plate 2110 and opened on the upper and rear sides. A member 2112, a plate-like base plate lens member 2113 having translucency attached to the lower side of the left and right side receiving members 2112 on the front surface of the base plate 2110, and the base plate lens An attacker side decorative board 2114 disposed on the rear side of the member 2113 and mounted on the front surface with an LED 2114a capable of emitting light of a predetermined color, and a board cover 2115 that covers the rear side of the attacker side decorative board 2114 and is attached to the rear surface of the base plate 2110. An attacker driving unit 2120 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 and pivotally supporting an opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the grand prize winning opening 2103 and rotationally drives the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the opening / closing member 2106; It is equipped with.

  As shown in the figure, a pair of movable pieces 2105 in the attacker unit 2100 includes a shaft hole 2105a penetrating in the front-rear direction near the lower end, a working hole 2105b that is eccentric from the shaft hole 2105a and extends rearward from the rear surface, It has. In addition, the opening / closing member 2106 includes a shaft portion 2106a formed at both left and right ends, a working flange portion 2106b that is eccentric from the shaft portion 2106a and protrudes leftward from the front end in a front view, and forward from left and right ends at the lower front portion. And a stopper 2106c for restricting the rotational position of the protruding opening / closing member 2106 in the opening direction.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and has a relief-like decoration on the surface. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110 a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second start port 2102. In addition, the base plate 2110 is provided with a flange 2110a that extends backward to be able to guide the game ball at a position corresponding to the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, the big winning port 2103, and the general winning port 2104. ing.

  The central receiving member 2110 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 has a relief-like decoration on the front surface and is formed of a member having low translucency. The central receiving member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions 2111a extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at a wider interval than the left and right widths of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110. The shaft portions 2111a are moved to the movable piece 2105. The movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported by being inserted into the shaft hole 2105a.

  Further, the side receiving member 2112 of the attacker unit 2100 has a relief-like decoration on the front surface and is formed of a member having low translucency. Further, the base plate lens member 2113 of the attacker unit 2100 is provided with an arabesque pattern-like relief, and a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface of only the arabesque pattern-like portion is provided. As shown in FIG. 46, the portion of the base plate lens member 2113 provided with the plating layer is formed so as to cover the LED 2114a mounted on the attacker side decorative substrate 2114 in a front view, and a part of the LED 2114a. Will come from the player side.

  The attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 includes a start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102, and a start for transmitting the drive of the start port solenoid 2121 to the movable piece 2105. The mouth drive transmission member 2122, and the start port drive mechanism base 2123 that supports the start port drive transmission member 2122 and the start port solenoid 2121 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110.

  The start port solenoid 2121 has a plunger 2121a that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is biased in a protruding direction by a coil spring (not shown), and is located below the first start port 2101 and behind the second start port 2102. At the position, the plunger 2121a is supported by the start port drive mechanism base 2123 so as to protrude forward. As shown in the figure, the tip of the plunger 2121a of the start-up solenoid 2121 is formed in a disk shape extending in a direction perpendicular to the advance / retreat direction.

  The start port drive transmission member 2122 is pivotally supported at the front end of the start port drive mechanism base 2123 so as to rotate around a shaft extending in the left-right direction at a position below the plunger 2121a of the start port solenoid 2121. ing. The starter drive transmission member 2122 is formed in a substantially C-shape in a side view near the left and right ends of the plunger insertion portion 2122a into which the disc-shaped tip of the plunger 2121a is inserted at the substantially center upper side in the left-right direction. And a transmission engagement portion 2122b positioned in front of the shaft support position. The starting port drive transmission member 2122 is configured such that the rear end of the working lever portion 2105b of the movable piece 2105 is inserted into the inside of a substantially C-shaped transmission engagement portion 2122b.

  In a normal state, the transmission engagement portion 2122b is in a state where the substantially C-shaped open side is positioned below the shaft support position (the pair of movable pieces 2105 are upright and the second starting port 2102 is closed). It is like that. When the plunger 2121a of the start port solenoid 2121 is retracted by energizing the start port solenoid 2121, the open side is positioned higher than the shaft support position, and is inserted and engaged in the transmission engagement portion 2122b. Also, the action lever portion 2105b of the movable piece 2105 rises so that the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are separated from each other (the second start port 2102 is in an open state).

  The start port drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the start port solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side, and the start port drive transmission member 2122 is rotated around the axis extending in the left-right direction at the front end. It is formed so that it can be pivotally supported. Further, the starting port drive mechanism base 2123 has a first guiding portion 2123a that guides a game ball that is received in the first starting port 2101 on the upper surface and circulates through the corresponding flange portion 2110b of the base plate 2110 to the right in a front view. , A second guide part (detailed illustration is omitted) that is formed below the part that supports the start-up solenoid 2121 and that is received by the second start-up port 2102 and flows downward through the corresponding heel part 2110b. And).

  The attacker drive unit 2120 also includes an attacker solenoid 2124 for opening and closing an opening / closing member 2106 for opening and closing the prize winning opening 2103, an attacker drive transmission member 2125 for transmitting the drive of the attack solenoid 2124 to the opening / closing member 2106, and an attacker drive. An attacker drive mechanism base 2126 that supports the transmission member 2125 and the attacker solenoid 2124 and pivotally supports the opening / closing member 2106 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 below the start port drive mechanism base 2123; A second start port sensor 2127 that detects a game ball that is supported at a predetermined position of the drive mechanism base 2126 and received by the second start port 2102, and a second start port sensor 2127 that is supported at a position different from the second start port sensor 2127. Count to detect accepted game balls Sensor 2128, a large winning opening decoration board 2129 supported by the lower part of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 2129a on the upper surface, and a start opening solenoid 2121, an attacker solenoid 2124, supported by the upper face of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126, The second start port sensor 2127 and the attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100 are provided.

  The attacker solenoid 2124 in the attacker drive unit 2120 has a plunger 2124a that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is urged in a protruding direction by a coil spring (not shown), like the start port solenoid 2121. The attacker solenoid 2124 is attached to the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 so that the plunger 2124a moves forward and backward in the front view. As shown in the figure, the tip of the plunger 2124a of the attacker solenoid 2124 is formed in a disk shape extending in a direction perpendicular to the forward / backward direction.

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker drive transmission member 2125 is pivotally supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 so as to rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a position in front of and above the plunger 2124a of the attacker solenoid 2124. Has been. The attacker drive transmission member 2125 includes a shaft portion 2125a that extends in the front-rear direction and is pivotally supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126, a plate portion 2125b that extends in a fan shape (triangular shape) from the shaft portion 2125a, and a shaft portion 2125a. Is a pinch portion 2125c that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the plate portion 2125b at an eccentric position and can clamp the disc-shaped tip of the plunger 2124a of the attacker solenoid 2124, and is larger than the pinching portion 2125c with respect to the shaft portion 2125a. And two engagement pins 2125d protruding forward from the front surface of the plate portion 2125b at an eccentric position.

  As shown in the figure, the attacker drive transmission member 2125 is inserted between the two engagement pins 2125d so that the distal end of the action lever portion 2106b of the opening / closing member 2106 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 is inserted. Yes. In the normal state in which the plunger 2124a of the attacker solenoid 2124 protrudes due to the biasing force of the coil spring, the attacker drive transmission member 2125 has two engagement pins 2125d positioned below the shaft portion 2125a, and the upper engagement pin 2125d. Is in contact with the action flange 2106b of the opening / closing member 2106 to prevent the action flange 2106b from moving upward, so that the opening / closing member 2106 is in an upright state (the big prize opening 2103 is in a closed state). On the other hand, when the attacker solenoid 2124 is energized and the plunger 2124a is immersed (moved to the right when viewed from the front), the attacker drive transmission member 2125 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The two engaging pins 2125d are also rotated so as to move upward. As the engagement pin 2125d rises, the action flange 2106b of the opening / closing member 2106 inserted between the two engagement pins 2125d also rises, and the upper end of the opening / closing member 2106 moves relatively forward. And the upper end is positioned slightly above the horizontal (the big prize opening 2103 is in the open state).

  The attacker drive mechanism base 2126 in the attacker drive unit 2120 is formed in a box shape that is divided into two parts in the vertical direction, and can support the attacker solenoid 2124, the attacker drive transmission member 2125, etc. therein. . As shown in the figure, the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 2126a corresponding to the large winning opening 2103 of the base plate 2110, and a game ball received in the large winning opening 2103 is received. The inside enters through the opening 2126a. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the rear bottom surface of the opening 2126a in the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 is inclined so as to become lower toward the right rear portion when viewed from the front, and a big winning opening that penetrates downward to the bottom. A passage is formed, and the count sensor 2128 is supported so that a game ball circulating in the large winning opening passage can be detected. The attacker drive mechanism base 2126 has a start port passage penetrating in the vertical direction at a substantially central rear portion in the left-right direction, and a second start port sensor so that a game ball flowing in the start port passage can be detected. 2127 is supported.

  In this example, the board cover 2115, the start port drive mechanism base 2123, and the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the attacker drives by the light from the LED 2129a of the winning prize decoration board 2129. The inside of the mechanism base 2126 and the like can be decorated with light emission.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 are in a state where they can always accept game balls. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, the starting port solenoid 2121 is energized and driven in accordance with a normal lottery result in which a game ball passes through the gate 2302 in a gate member 2300 to be described later. 2105 is expanded and can be received. Also, in the grand prize winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (start winning prize) (the special lottery result is “big hit” or When the “small hit” is selected, the open / close member 2106 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern by the energizing drive of the attacker solenoid 2124 so that it can be received.

  Also, in the attacker unit 2100, the game ball received in the first start port 2101 is sent to the right first ball passage 3051 of the right ball guiding member 3050 in the back front unit 3000a in the back unit 3000, which will be described later. ing. The game ball received in the second starting port 2102 is discharged downward after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. Further, the game ball received in the special winning opening is detected by the count sensor 2128 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and then discharged downward. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2104 are the right second ball passage 3052 of the right ball passage member 3050 and the left first ball of the left ball passage member 3060 in the front front unit 3000a in the back unit 3000, which will be described later. It is sent to the passage 3061, the left second ball passage 3062, and the like.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged so that the forward / backward direction of the plunger 2124a is the left-right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged as close to the opening / closing member 2106 as possible. Therefore, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% compared to the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. .

[Side decoration members]
Next, the side decoration member 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side decoration member 2200 in the game board 4 is a lower part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 600, and from the front side to the opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed. After being inserted, the game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface, and is formed along the inner periphery of the game area 605.

  The side decoration member 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600 and is inserted into the main body member 2202 having an arc-shaped opening frame 2202a substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 605, and the opening frame 2202a in the main body member 2202. A transparent plate-like side lens member 2204, a lower left arc decoration substrate 2206 (see FIG. 46) disposed behind the side lens member 2204 and having a plurality of LEDs 2206a mounted thereon, and a lower left arc decoration substrate 2206. And a substrate cover 2208 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 2202 so as to cover from the side.

  As shown in the figure, the main body member 2202 of the side decoration member 2200 is provided with a shelf 2202b that is inclined so that the upper surface of the main body member 2202 bulges forward from the front surface of the game panel 600 and the upper surface is lowered toward the right side. The game ball that has flowed down on the shelf 2202b can be guided to the center in the left-right direction in the game area 605. The main body member 2202 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  Further, the side lens member 2204 in the side decoration member 2200 is provided with an arabesque pattern-like relief, and a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface of only the arabesque pattern-like portion is provided. Thus, an arc-shaped lower left arc decoration portion 2205 is formed. Although not shown in detail, the portion of the side lens member 2204 provided with the plating layer is formed so as to cover the LED 2206a mounted on the lower left arc decoration board 2206 in front view, and a part of the LED 2206a. Is faced from the player side (see FIG. 46).

[Gate material]
Next, the gate member 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The gate member 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed on the left side of the transparent game panel 600 in the left and right direction center and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. The game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. The gate member 2300 has a gate 2302 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game ball that has passed through the gate 2302 can be detected by a gate sensor 2304 disposed in the gate 2302. It is like that.

  Note that the gate member 2300 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the conventional gate member, and the portion on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 600 is the thickness of the game panel 600. It will fit within.

[Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2400 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view seen obliquely from the center board with the back plate removed. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen obliquely from the back with the center board removed. The center accessory 2400 of this example is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent game panel 600. As shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 605, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball between the outer periphery of the game area 605 It is formed in an arc shape so as to form a gap, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 605. .

  The center accessory 2400 includes a thin plate-like flange portion 2401 that contacts the front surface of the game panel 600 and an insertion wall portion that extends from the flange portion 2401 toward the opening portion 600e of the game panel 600. 2402 and a front wall portion 2403 that protrudes forward from the flange portion 2401. The front wall portion 2403 of the center accessory 2400 is formed with an upper shelf portion 2404 that is inclined from the substantially central position in the left-right direction on the upper outer peripheral surface to the left side so as to become lower toward the left direction. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the area 605 flows down to the upper shelf 2404, the game ball flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2400 and flows down (enters) to the right of the upper shelf 2404. The ball flows down to the lower part of the game area 605 through the right side of the center accessory 2400. That is, if the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2404 in the center accessory 2400, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to appropriately adjust the length, and to maintain a sense of tension and to suppress a loose game.

  The center accessory 2400 has a warp entrance 2405 (see FIG. 11) in which a game ball flowing down the game area 605 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall 2403, and a game that has entered the warp entrance 2405. A warp outlet 2406 that discharges the ball into the frame, and a game ball released from the warp outlet 2406 rolls in the left-right direction and then is released into the game area 605 on the upper side of the attacker unit 2100, and the upper side of the lower side of the insertion wall 2402 And a stage 2410 formed in the above. The stage 2410 in the center accessory 2400 is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2411 to which the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2406 is supplied, and the game ball is supplied from the first stage 2411. And a second stage 2412 capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 605.

  The first stage 2411 and the second stage 2412 are formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. Is received (wins) into the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 with a high probability.

  The center accessory 2400 includes a transparent plate-like back plate 2407 which is attached to the rear end of the insertion wall portion 2402 and closes most of the frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The back plate 2407 can prevent the game ball supplied on the stage 2410 from dropping out to the rear of the stage 2410 and causing a problem.

  Further, the center accessory 2400 is arranged on the right side of the front wall portion 2403 when viewed from the front, at the upper end of the arc-shaped right arc decoration portion 2420 formed along the inner periphery of the game area 605 and the right arc decoration portion 2420. A right circular decorative portion 2421 having a round shape, a plurality of star-shaped decorative portions 2422 arranged at predetermined positions of the center accessory 2400, and a plurality of dotted decorative portions 2423 arranged along the inside of the right arc decorative portion 2420. (See FIG. 11), a right logo decoration portion 2424 whose outer shape is rectangular in the center in the vertical direction inside the right arc decoration portion 2420 (left side of the front view), and a right logo decoration arranged at the center upper portion in the horizontal direction. Upper and middle logo decoration portions 2425 that are approximately half the size of the portion 2424 are mainly provided.

  As shown in the drawing, the right arc decoration portion 2420 has an arabesque pattern decoration in an arc-shaped frame, and is formed in a state where the space between the frame and the arabesque pattern is removed in the front-rear direction. A plating layer having a metallic luster is provided on the surface of the right arc decoration portion 2420. The right circular decorative portion 2421 includes a circular central portion that bulges forward and has translucency, and an extended portion that extends in a fan shape from the outer periphery of the central portion and has a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface. ing. Furthermore, the star-shaped decorative portion 2422 has a star-shaped decagonal shape and an inner shape formed in a polygonal pyramid shape from the apex of the outer shape toward the center rear, and the inner shape of the small star is opposite ( It has a large star that protrudes forward) about three times the size of a small star, and has five small stars arranged in a circle on the front of the large star, and a plated layer with a metallic luster on the entire surface. Is provided.

  In addition, the dot-shaped decorative portion 2423 has a hemispherical front end made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed so that the player looks like a bullet-like LED. Further, the right logo decoration portion 2424 is formed in a rectangular frame with a predetermined logo having translucency. Furthermore, the upper and middle logo decoration part 2425 includes a base in which small pentagrams are arranged at respective vertices of a pentagon of a predetermined size, a logo frame arranged on the front surface of the base and having a substantially square outer shape, A logo part of a predetermined shape arranged in the logo frame, and five small stars on the base and the logo part are white, and the surface of the other part is plated with metallic luster Layers are provided.

  The center accessory 2400 is arranged on the rear side of the right arc decoration portion 2420 and is arranged on the rear side of the right circular decoration portion 2421 and a right arc decoration board 2430 on which a plurality of LEDs 2430a are mounted in an arc shape. A right circular decorative board 2432 on which the LEDs 2432a are mounted, and a right logo decorative board 2434 (see FIG. 46) which is arranged on the rear side of the right logo decorative portion 2424 and on which a plurality of LEDs 2434a are mounted. As shown in the drawing, the LED 2430a mounted on the right arc decoration board 2430 is arranged so that a part of the arabesque pattern-like portion of the right arc decoration portion 2420 is applied when viewed from the front. Will come from the player side.

  The center accessory 2400 of the present example can cause the right arc decoration portion 2420 to emit light in an arc shape by causing the LED 2430a of the right arc decoration board 2430 to emit light in an appropriate color, and at the same time, emit light from the dot decoration portion 2423. It can be decorated. Also, the LED 2432a of the right circular decorative substrate 2432 can emit light in an appropriate color so that the right circular decorative portion can be decorated with light emission. Further, the LED 2434a of the right logo decoration board 2434 can emit light with an appropriate color so that the right logo decoration portion 2424 can be decorated with light emission.

  Although not shown in detail, the center accessory 2400 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surfaces of the flange portion 2401 and the front wall portion 2403, and a right arc decoration portion 2420, a right circular decoration portion. Along with the outer extended portion 2421, the star-shaped decorative portion 2422, the right logo decorative portion 2424, etc., the plating layer having a metallic luster has a high light reflectivity, and the whole shines brightly and brilliantly. In particular, in the star-shaped decorative portion 2422, a plurality of large and small polygonal pyramids are formed on the surface (front surface), and incident light can be reflected with a sparkle like a jewel.

  In the center accessory 2400, the insertion wall portion 2402 including the stage 2410 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 disposed on the lower rear side can be seen through the stage 2410. It is like that. Further, the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 of the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 disposed on the rear side through the frame of the center accessory 2400 are displayed from the player side. It looks good.

[Back unit]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the front front unit 3000a of the back unit 3000 in the gaming board 4 of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the back front unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the back front unit as seen from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the front front unit as seen from the front after disassembling the main members. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the front front unit, which is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The back front unit 3000a in the back unit 3000 of this example forms a back box 621 together with a back box main body 3100 in the back front unit 3000b described later, and closes the front end opening of the back box main body 3100 and holds the game panel 600. A back box front plate 3010 attached to the rear side of the holder 630 and having a rectangular outer shape and a frame shape, a back front upper decorative member 3020 attached to the upper front of the back box front plate 3010, and a back box front plate 3010 In the attacker unit 2100, the back front left decorative member 3030 attached to the front left side of the front box, the back front lower decorative member 3040 attached to the front lower portion of the back box front plate 3010, and the back front lower decorative member 3040 The right ball that receives the game balls received at the first starting port 2101 and the two general winning ports 2104 on the right side and guides them downward. A lead member 3050, a left sphere guide member 3060 that is disposed on the left side of the lower front decorative member 3040 and receives the game balls received in the two general winning ports 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and guides them downward, and a back box A plurality of star-shaped decorative members 3070 attached near the upper right corner of the front surface of the front plate 3010 and having the same shape as the star-shaped decorative portion 2422 of the center accessory 2400 are provided.

  The back box front plate 3010 in the back front unit 3000a is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in the figure, the outer shape is a substantially rectangular shape and has an opening 3011 that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a predetermined shape. A plate frame-shaped main body wall portion 3012, an outer wall portion 3013 extending short forward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body wall portion 3012, and an opening 3011 on the upper side from a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. An inner wall portion 3014 extending short from the front surface of the main body wall portion 3012 on the upper side from a position slightly below the center along the inner peripheral edge, and a panel holder extending outwardly from the front end of the outer wall portion 3012 in a flange shape And a fixing portion 621a for attaching to 630.

  As shown in the drawing, the opening 3011 of the back box front plate 3010 is formed at a position eccentric to the upper side with respect to the substantially rectangular main body wall 3012, and the lower front surface of the frame-shaped main body wall 3012. Is formed wider than the upper front surface. In addition, the inner wall portion 3014 is formed in an arc shape on both the left and right sides substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 605 and an arc shape in which the center in the left and right direction on the lower side swells upward. Although detailed description is omitted, between the outer wall portion 3013 and the inner wall portion 3014 in the main body wall portion 3012, there is a back front upper decorative member 3020, a back front left decorative member 3030, and a back front lower decorative member 3040. The right sphere guide member 3050, the left sphere guide member 3060, the star-shaped decorative member 3070, and the mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the back box body 3100 and the like in the back rear unit 3000b are formed at appropriate positions.

  Further, the front front upper decorative member 3020 in the back front unit 3000a is formed in a horizontally long arc shape with the upper end substantially parallel to the inner periphery of the game area 605, and the upper end arc at a position corresponding to the horizontal center of the game area 605. The upper arc decoration portion 3021 having an arc shape with a smaller curvature, the upper left logo decoration portion 3022 arranged on the left side of the upper arc decoration portion 3021, and the outer circumference of the upper left logo decoration portion 3022 and the upper arc decoration portion 3021 are covered. The star-shaped decorative portion 3023 having the same shape as the star-shaped decorative portion 2422 in the center accessory 2400 and the plurality of LEDs 3024a (see FIG. 46) arranged in a circular arc shape are arranged on the rear side of the upper arc-shaped decorative portion 3021. The mounted upper arc decoration board 3024 and the lower arc decoration board 3024 are arranged on the lower side and on the rear side of the star-shaped decoration portion 3023 so that the lower surface can be irradiated with light downward. It comprises an upper decorative substrate 3025 where the number of LED3025a (see Figure 46) is mounted, the.

  The upper arc decoration portion 3021 of the front upper decoration member 3020 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and has an arabesque pattern decoration in the arc-shaped frame, between the frame and the arabesque pattern. Is formed in a state of being removed in the front-rear direction. The upper arc decoration board 3024 arranged on the rear side of the upper arc decoration section 3021 is arranged such that each LED 3024a partially covers the arabesque pattern in the upper arc decoration section 3021 when viewed from the front. Will come from the player side. The LED 3024a of the upper arc decoration board 3024 can emit light with an appropriate color so that the upper arc decoration portion 3021 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, the upper left logo decoration portion 3022 of the front upper upper decorative member 3020 has a base on which a small pentagram is placed at each vertex of a pentagon of a predetermined size, and a front face of the base. It has a substantially square logo frame and a logo part of a predetermined shape arranged in the logo frame, the five small stars on the base and the logo part are white, and the surface of other parts Is provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster. The upper left logo decoration portion 3022 is approximately half the size of the right logo decoration portion 2424 of the center accessory 2400. The front upper decorative member 3020 is also provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface of the star-shaped decorative portion 3023. Further, the LED 3025a of the upper decorative board 3025 is appropriately lit to emit light so that the upper working decorative body unit 3200, the lower movable decorative body unit 3600, etc. of the rear rear unit 3000b arranged on the lower side, the stage in the center accessory 2400, etc. 2410 and the like can be decorated with light emission.

  The back front left decorative member 3030 in the back front unit 3000a is formed along the inner periphery of the game area 605, and is continuous with the lower left arc decorative portion 2205 of the side decorative member 2200 in the front unit 2000 in a front view. The formed arc-shaped upper left arc decoration portion 3031, the circular left circular decoration portion 3032 arranged at the upper end of the upper left arc decoration portion 3031, and the outer shape arranged on the inner side (right side of the front view) of the upper left arc decoration portion 3031 Is a rectangular left logo decoration portion 3033, and a plurality of star-shaped decoration portions 3034 arranged so as to be continuous from the inside of the upper left arc decoration portion 3031 and the vicinity of the upper end of the upper left arc decoration portion 3031 to the left end of the back front upper decoration member 3020. And an upper left arc-mounted device in which a plurality of LEDs 3035a (see FIG. 46) are mounted in an arc shape on the front surface, arranged on the rear side of the upper left arc-decorating portion 3031. A substrate 3035, and a, a left circular decorative substrate 3036 LED3036a (see Figure 46) is mounted on the front is disposed on the rear side of the left circular decorative 3032.

  The upper left arc decoration portion 3031 in the front left decorative member 3030 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and has an arabesque pattern decoration in the arc-shaped frame, between the frame and the arabesque pattern. Is formed in a state of being removed in the front-rear direction. The upper left arc decoration board 3035 arranged on the rear side of the upper left arc decoration portion 3031 is arranged such that each LED 3035a partially covers the arabesque pattern in the upper left arc decoration portion 3031 when viewed from the front. Will come from the player side. The LED 3035a of the upper left arc decoration board 3035 is appropriately illuminated so that the upper left arc decoration portion 3021 can be illuminated. Note that the upper left arc decoration portion 3031 is outside the inner wall portion 3014 (between the outer wall portion 3013 and the inner wall portion 3014 so that the inner side (right side when viewed from the front) is substantially in contact with the inner wall portion 3014 of the back box front plate 3010. ).

  The left circular decorative portion 3032 of the front left decorative member 3030 has a circular central portion that bulges forward and has translucency, and a plating layer that extends in a fan shape from the outer periphery of the central portion and has a metallic luster on the surface. The circular center portion has a smaller diameter than the right circular decorative portion 2421 of the center accessory 2400. A left circular decorative substrate 3036 is disposed on the rear side of the left circular decorative portion 3032, and the LED 3036 a of the left circular decorative substrate 3036 emits light in an appropriate color so that the left circular decorative portion 3032 can be decorated with light emission. It can be done.

  Also, the left logo decoration portion 3033 of the front left decorative member 3030 is a small pentagram at each vertex of a pentagon of predetermined size, similar to the upper left logo decoration portion 3022 of the upper front decorative member 3020. Each having a base, a logo frame which is arranged in front of the base and has a substantially square outer shape, and a logo part of a predetermined shape which is arranged in the logo frame. The star and the logo are white, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is provided on the surface of the other part. The left logo decoration portion 3033 is substantially the same size as the upper left logo decoration portion 3022.

  Further, the star-shaped decorative portion 3034 of the left front decorative member 3030 is similar to the star-shaped decorative portion 2422 of the center accessory 2400, and the outer shape is a decagonal shape with the star shape extending from the apex of the outer shape toward the center rear. The star is formed in a polygonal pyramid shape, and the inner shape of the star is projected in the opposite direction (forward). The star has approximately three times the size of the star. Five stars are in front of the star. It is a form arranged in a circumferential shape, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is provided on the entire surface.

  The lower front decorative member 3040 in the front unit 3000a is a semicircular arc that swells upward so as to substantially contact the lower side of the arc-shaped portion formed on the lower side of the inner wall portion 3014 of the back box front plate 3010. A decoration part 3041, a semicircular lower arc decoration part 3042 that closes the semicircular arc of the lower arc decoration part 3041, and a plurality of LEDs 3043a (see FIG. 46) arranged at the rear side of the lower arc decoration part 3041. A lower arc decoration board 3043 mounted in an arc shape, and a magnetic detection sensor 3044 attached to the rear side of the lower arc inner decoration portion 3042 and capable of detecting predetermined magnetism. The lower front decorative member 3040 is formed so that the lower arc decorative portion 3041 surrounds the outer periphery of the attacker unit 2100 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 9 and the like).

  The lower arc decoration part 3041 of the lower front lower decorative member 3040 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and has an arabesque pattern decoration in the arc-shaped frame, between the frame and the arabesque pattern. Is formed in a state of being removed in the front-rear direction. The lower arc decoration board 3043 disposed on the rear side of the lower arc decoration portion 3040 is arranged such that each LED 3043a partially covers the arabesque pattern in the lower arc decoration portion 3041 when viewed from the front. Will come from the player side. By making the LED 3043a of the lower arc decoration board 3043 emit light in an appropriate color, the lower arc decoration portion 3041 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As shown in the figure, the lower front arc decoration part 3042 of the lower back front decoration member 3040 includes a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and radially extending rod-shaped reliefs are arranged in the circumferential direction. . The lower arc inner decorative portion 3042 has an opening 3042a having a predetermined shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center in the left-right direction, and the rear end of the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 is inserted into the opening 3042a. It has come to be. The lower arc inner decorative portion 3042 has a radially extending relief portion as a plating layer having a different color from the others.

  The right sphere guiding member 3050 in the front front unit 3000a is received by the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 600 by the corresponding flange 2110b, and the first ball of the starting port driving mechanism base 2123 is detected. The right first ball passage 3051 that receives the game ball guided to the right by the guide portion 2123a and guides and discharges it downward, and the two general winning holes 2104 on the right side in the front view of the attacker unit 2100, and the corresponding saddle portion. A right second ball passage 3052 that receives each of the game balls guided to the rear side of the game panel 600 by 2110b and guides and discharges the game balls downward from one place;

  A first start port sensor 3080 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 is attached to the right sphere guide member 3050 near the upper end of the right first sphere passage 3051. The right ball guiding member 3050 has a general winning port sensor 3081 for detecting game balls received in the two general winning ports 2104 arranged on the right side of the attacker unit 2100 near the lower end of the right second ball passage 3052. Can be installed.

  The left sphere guiding member 3060 in the front front unit 3000a is received in the general winning port 2104 on the left center side in the front view in the attacker unit 2100, and the gaming ball guided to the rear side of the gaming panel 600 by the corresponding flange portion 2110b. The first left ball passage 3061 that is received and guided and discharged downward, and the general winning port 2104 on the left outer side in front view of the attacker unit 2100, and the game guided to the rear side of the game panel 600 by the corresponding flange 2110 b A left second ball passage 3062 that receives the ball and guides and discharges the ball downward.

  The left sphere guide member 3060 detects the game balls received in the two general winning holes 2104 on the left side when viewed from the front in the attacker unit 2100 near the lower ends of the left first ball passage 3061 and the left second ball passage 3062, respectively. A general winning opening sensor 3081 is attached.

  Further, the star-shaped decorative member 3070 in the front front unit 3000a has the same configuration as the above-described star-shaped decorative portions 2422, 3023, 3034 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 9 and the like, the back front unit 3000a of this example includes a back front upper decorative member 3020, a back front left decorative member 3030, a back front lower decorative member 3040, and a star-shaped decorative member 3070. It is provided so as to be located outside 2100 and can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent game panel 600. Also, since the back front upper decorative member 3020, the back front left decorative member 3030, the back front lower decorative member 3040, and the star shaped decorative member 3070 are arranged on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 600, the upper arc decoration The board 3024, the upper left arc decoration board 3035, the left circular decoration board 3036, the lower arc decoration board 3043, and the like can be decorated with light emission, and the light from them is reflected by the transparent gaming panel 600 and irradiated to the front side. By doing so, it can be further reflected to the player side by the plating layer provided on the surface, and a glittering light emitting decoration can be performed.

[Overall configuration of rear unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back rear unit 3000b of the back unit 3000 in the gaming board 4 of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the back rear unit in the back unit as viewed from obliquely front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the back and back unit in the back unit as viewed from obliquely behind. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear unit disassembled for each main member and viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the oblique rear. FIG.

  The back rear unit 3000b in the back unit 3000 of this example forms a back box 621 together with the back box front plate 3010 of the back front unit 3000a, is a box shape with the front side opened, and has a rectangular shape penetrating the rear wall 621b in the front-rear direction. A back box body 3100 having an opening 621c, an upper movable decorative body unit 3200 attached to the upper side of the opening 621c in the back box main body 3100, a lower side of the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 in the back box main body 3100 and A side movable decorative body unit 3400 attached to the left and right sides of the opening 621c, a lower movable decorative body unit 3600 attached to the lower side of the opening 621c in the back box main body 3100, and a rear attached lower portion of the back box main body 3100 A lamp driving board containing one lamp driving board 3801 and a second lamp driving board 3802 (see FIG. 53). The box 3804 is attached to the left side (right side in the rear view) of the lamp driving board box 3804 and relays the connection between the main unit control board 4100 and the attacker unit relay board 2130, the gate sensor 2304, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. A panel relay substrate 3806 and a right relay terminal plate 3808 and a left relay terminal plate 3810 attached to the vicinity of the left and right sides of the rear surface of the rear wall 621b in the back box body 3100 are provided.

  As shown in the drawing, the back box body 3100 in the back rear unit 3000b is formed in a box shape with the front side opened, and a rectangular opening 621c penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the rear wall 621b. The back box body 3100 includes two fixing grooves 3102 that are recessed outward on the left side (right side in rear view) of the opening 621c on the rear surface of the rear wall 621b, and a lock member that is attached to the opposite side across the opening 621c. (The illustration is omitted), and a fixing piece 1402 protruding from the left side surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is inserted into the fixing groove 3102 and the right side fixing piece 1402 is supported by a lock member. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can be detachably attached to the rear side of the back box body 3100. The liquid crystal display device 1400 attached to the rear side of the back box body 3100 has a display screen facing from the front side through the opening 621c.

  The back box body 3100 includes a terminal plate mounting base 3104 for supporting the right relay terminal plate 3808 on the right side (left side in the rear view) of the opening 621c on the rear surface of the rear wall 621b. The terminal board mounting base 3104 is configured so that a portion to which the right relay terminal board 3808 is attached rotates between a fixed position located in the opening 621c and an open position located outside the opening 621c in front view. It has become. When the liquid crystal display device 1400 is attached to or detached from the back box body 3100, the terminal plate mounting base 3104 is rotated to the open position, so that the terminal plate mounting base 3104 (right relay terminal plate 3808) becomes an obstacle. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can be attached and detached without any change, and after the liquid crystal display device 1400 is attached, the terminal plate mounting base 3104 is rotated to a fixed position, so that the back surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be removed. By being positioned at, the amount of protrusion to the rear side can be reduced.

  Further, the back box body 3100 includes a plate-like back decoration plate 3106 with a predetermined decoration on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the opening 621c on the front surface of the rear wall 621b. Although detailed description is omitted, the back box body 3100 includes a back box front plate 3010, an upper movable decorative body unit 3200, a side movable decorative body unit 3400, a lower movable decorative body unit 3600, a lamp driving board box 3804, Mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting and fixing the panel relay board 3806 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, in this example, the back box body 3100 is formed of a black, non-translucent rigid resin, and when viewed from the player side, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200, the side movable decorative body unit 3400, and the lower The rear side of the movable decorative body unit 3600 becomes dark, and it can be given an illusion that it is deeper than the actual one. In addition, the contrast can be increased when the light emitting decoration is applied, and a light emitting decoration having a higher decorative effect can be achieved. It can be done.

  The lamp drive board box 3804 attached to the rear side of the back box body 3100 holds the two first lamp drive boards 3801 and the second lamp drive board 3802 so as to face each other, as shown in FIG. doing.

[Upper movable decorative unit]
Next, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 in the back rear unit 3000b will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the upper movable decorative body of the back rear unit in the back unit as viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the upper movable decorative body unit of the back rear unit in the back unit as viewed from an oblique rear. . FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable decorative body unit disassembled for each main member and viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 33 is an exploded view of the upper movable decorative body unit for each main member and obliquely viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 34 is a plan view showing the upper movable decorative body unit with the unit base and the slider cover omitted, and FIG. 35 is a front view showing the relationship between the main unit and the star unit in the upper movable decorative body unit. FIG. 36 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the upper movable decorative body unit. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper movable decorative body unit.

  The upper movable decorative body unit 3200 in the back rear unit 3000b of the present embodiment is mounted on the upper side of the opening 621c in the back box main body 3100 and extends in the left-right direction, and is disposed on the front right side of the main body unit 3210. The right logo movable decorative body 3230 that can be moved in the left-right direction by the unit 3210 and the left side of the front face of the main body unit 3210 so as to be aligned with the right logo movable decorative body 3230 can be moved in the left-right direction by the main body unit 3210. The left logo movable decorative body 3235, the right logo movable decorative body 3230, and the star unit 3240 which is disposed between the left logo movable decorative body 3235 and the main body unit 3210 and can be moved up and down by the main body unit 3210 are provided.

  The main body unit 3210 of the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 includes a unit base 3211 extending in the left-right direction, and a pair of logo drive motors attached so that the rotation shaft protrudes upward near the left and right ends on the rear side of the unit base 3211. 3212, a logo drive gear 3213 fixed to the rotation shaft of the logo drive motor 3212, and a rack gear 3214a that meshes with the logo drive gear 3213 and extends linearly in the left-right direction, and slides in the left-right direction at the upper left and right of the unit base 3211. A pair of sliders 3214 supported in a possible manner and a slider cover 3215 attached to the upper surface of the unit base 3211 so as to cover the upper side of the slider 3214 are provided.

  The main unit 3210 includes a pair of star unit lifting drive motors 3216 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3211 so that the rotation shaft 3216a protrudes forward at an intermediate position between the center in the left and right direction and both ends of the left and right sides. A lifting arm 3217 that is fixed to the rotating shaft 3216a of the unit lifting drive motor 3216 and that is disposed on the front surface of the unit base 3211 and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotating shaft 3216a, and projects forward from the tip of the lifting arm 3217. There are provided lifting pins 3218 attached, and star-shaped star-shaped decorative portions 3219 attached to both front ends of the unit base 3211 outside the rotation range of the lifting arms 3217.

  Further, the main unit 3210 is attached to a predetermined position on the upper part of the unit base 3211 and a pair of slide detection sensors 3220 for detecting the slide position of the slider 3214, and the rotation position of the lifting arm 3217 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3211. A pair of up / down detection sensors 3221 to be detected, an upper right relay terminal plate 3222 and an upper left relay mounted on the rear side of the unit base 3211 between the central portion in the left-right direction and the left / right star unit up / down drive motor 3216, respectively. Terminal plate 3223.

  As shown in the figure, the unit base 3211 in the main body unit 3210 has a vertically long box-shaped storage part 3211a that extends upward in the center in the left-right direction, and a star unit to be described later in the storage part 3211a. A 3240 star rotation drive motor 3242 is accommodated so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Further, the unit base 3211 is provided with an elevation stopper 3211b protruding forward on the front surface in the vicinity of the star unit elevation drive motor 3216, and the elevation arm 3217 positioned at the raised position comes into contact with the rotation of the elevation arm 3217. The edge can be regulated.

  The slider 3214 in the main unit 3210 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a rack gear 3214a that meshes with the logo drive gear 3213 is formed along the rear end side. The slider 3214 is provided with a detection piece 3214b at the rear end nearer the center of the unit base 3211. The detection piece 3214b is detected by a slide detection sensor 3220. Further, the slider 3214 includes a pair of mounting bosses 3214c protruding forward at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction at the front end near the center with respect to the unit base 3211. The right logo movable decorative body is provided on the mounting boss 3214c. 3230 and a left logo movable decorative body 3235 can be respectively attached.

  Further, the elevating arm 3217 in the main body unit 3210 is fixed to the rotation shaft 3216a of the star unit elevating drive motor 3216, and supports the elevating pins 3218 at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft 3216a. Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the lifting arm 3217 has a detection piece detected by a lifting detection sensor 3221 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3211 at a predetermined position. The lift arm 3217 is configured such that the detection piece comes into contact with the lift stopper 3211b of the unit base 3211 when the lift arm 3217 is rotated to the raised position.

  Further, the star-shaped decorative portion 3219 in the main body unit 3210 has a polygonal pyramid shape from the apex of the outer shape to the center rear, as in the star-shaped decorative portion 3034 of the back and front unit 3000a. The formed small star and the inner shape of the small star protrude in the opposite direction (forward), and has about three times as large as the small star. It has a form, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is provided on the entire surface.

  The right logo movable decorative body 3230 in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 has a three-dimensional outer shape, has a relief-shaped logo portion 3231a and a star-shaped star portion 3231b on the front surface, and is translucent and formed of a synthetic resin. A main body 3231, a front logo frame 3232 having an opening 3232 a that is held on the front side of the main body 3231 and through which the logo 3323 a and the star 3231 b can pass, and a plurality of LEDs 3233 a (see FIG. 36) arranged in the main body 3231. And a board cover 3234 that covers the rear side of the right logo decoration board 3233 and is attached to the rear surface of the main body 3231.

  Although the detailed illustration of the main body portion 3231 in the right logo movable decorative body 3230 is omitted, the front surface of the logo portion 3231a has a smooth shape, whereas the rear surface of the logo portion 3231a has a complex polyhedral shape. The logo portion 3231a is a prism-like lens. As a result, the light incident on the logo portion 3231a is diffused and spectrally dispersed inside, so that it looks like a complex and beautiful rainbow color. Further, the star portion 3231b of the main body portion 3231 is formed in a pyramid shape with the center protruding forward. The main body portion 3231 further includes a fixing portion 3231c extending in a plate shape obliquely upward and rearward from the upper rear end, and this fixing portion 3231c is attached to an attachment boss 3214c of the slider 3214. .

  Further, the front logo frame 3232 of the right logo movable decorative body 3230 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface. Further, the front logo frame 3232 includes an upper right logo decoration portion 3232b in the upper right corner when viewed from the front. The upper right logo decoration part 3232b is similar to the upper left logo decoration part 3022 and the left logo decoration part 3033 in the front unit 3000a, and a small pentagram is formed at each vertex of a pentagram of a predetermined size. The base has a logo frame that is arranged in front of the base and has a substantially square outer shape, and a logo portion of a predetermined shape that is arranged in the logo frame, and five small stars on the base The logo portion is white, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is provided on the surface of other portions. The upper right logo decoration part 3232b has substantially the same size as the upper left logo decoration part 3022 and the left logo decoration part 3033.

  The right logo movable decorative body 3230 of this example can light-decorate the logo portion 3231a and the star portion 3231b by causing the LED 3233a of the right logo decorative substrate 3233 to emit light in appropriate colors. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main body portion 3231 includes a translucent partition wall that partitions the logo portion 3231a and the star portion 3231b. The logo portion 3231a and the star portion 3231b are separately provided. It can be decorated with light emission.

  The left logo movable decorative body 3235 in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 has a three-dimensional outer shape, and has a relief-like logo portion 3236a and a star-shaped star portion 3236b on the front surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin having translucency. A main body 3236, a front logo frame 3237 having an opening 3237a that is held on the front side of the main body 3236 and through which the logo 3236a and the star 3236b can pass, and a plurality of LEDs 3238a (see FIG. And a board cover 3239 that covers the rear side of the left logo decoration board 3238 and is attached to the rear surface of the main body 3236.

  Although the detailed illustration of the main body portion 3236 of the left logo movable decorative body 3235 is omitted, the front surface of the logo portion 3236a has a smooth shape, whereas the rear surface of the logo portion 3236a has a complex polyhedral shape. The logo portion 3236a is a prism-like lens. As a result, the light incident on the logo portion 3236a is diffused and diffused inside to be seen as a complex and beautiful rainbow color. The star portion 3236b of the main body portion 3236 is formed in a pyramid shape with the center protruding forward. The main body 3236 further includes a fixing portion 3236c extending in a plate shape obliquely upward and rearward from the upper rear end, and the fixing portion 3236c is attached to an attachment boss 3214c of the slider 3214. . Furthermore, the front logo frame 3237 in the left logo movable decorative body 3235 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The left logo movable decorative body 3235 of this example can light-decorate the logo portion 3236a and the star portion 3236b by causing the LED 3238a of the left logo decorative substrate 3238 to emit light in an appropriate color. Although not shown in detail, the main body 3236 includes a light-transmitting partition wall that partitions the logo portion 3236a and the star portion 3236b. The logo portion 3236a and the star portion 3236b are separately provided. It can be decorated with light emission.

  The star unit 3240 in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 includes a plate-shaped star unit base 3241 that extends in the left-right direction, and a star whose rotational axis extends to the front side attached to the rear upper center of the star unit base 3241 in the left-right direction. A rotation drive motor 3242, a drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the star rotation drive motor 3242, and a driven gear (illustration is shown) that meshes with the drive gear and is arranged in the center of the star unit base in the left-right direction. A star-shaped rotating decoration body 3245 having a shaft portion 3245a fixed to the shaft center of the driven gear and having a predetermined size disposed on the front side of the star unit base 3241; and a star-shaped rotating decoration body 3245; A star portion 3246a having substantially the same size, and a plurality of openings 3246b arranged at predetermined positions in the star portion 3246a and penetrating in the front-rear direction, A star base 3246 disposed between the rolling decoration body 3245 and the driven gear and rotatably supporting a shaft portion 3245a of the star-shaped rotary decoration body 3245, and covering the front side of the driven gear and the driving gear, and a star base 3246 And a star decoration board 3247 (see FIG. 36) on which a plurality of LEDs 3247a are mounted on the front face so as to face the front side through the opening 3246b of the star base 3246. Yes.

  The star unit 3240 includes two star-shaped decorative bodies 3248 that are arranged on the front side of the star unit base 3241 on the left and right outer sides of the star portion 3246a of the star base 3246 and smaller than the star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245, and Left and right upper star decoration boards 3249 mounted on the front surface of a plurality of LEDs 3249a (see FIG. 36) mounted at positions corresponding to the left and right star-shaped decorative bodies 3248 on the rear side of the unit base 3241; And a star rotation detection sensor 3250 that is attached to 3241 and can detect the rotation position of the driven gear that rotates together with the star-shaped rotating decorative body 32445.

  The star unit base 3241 in the star unit 3240 includes a pair of elongated holes 3241a that can pass through the lifting pins 3218 in the main body unit 3210 and extend in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction at the upper left and right ends. The star unit 3240 is supported by the main body unit 3210 by inserting the left and right elevating pins 3218 of the main body unit 3210 into the left and right elongated holes 3241 a of the star unit base 3241. In this example, a sliding bush is rotatably inserted into the lifting pin 3218, the lifting pin 3218 is inserted into the elongated hole 3241a via the sliding bush, and the sliding bush is The long hole 3241a is slid (rolled) in the left-right direction.

  The star unit base 3241 includes a plurality of star-shaped decorative portions 3241b similar to the star-shaped decorative portion 3219 of the main body unit 3210 on substantially the entire front surface. The star unit base 3241 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is applied only to the front surface of a part of the star-shaped decorative portion 3241b, and the remaining star-shaped decorative portion 3241b. The portion where the long hole 3241a is formed and the position where the star-shaped decorative body 3248 is attached are not coated with a plating layer and are in a transparent state.

  The star-shaped rotating decoration body 3245 in the star unit 3240 covers the front surface of the rotating star base 3245b and a transparent plate-shaped rotating star base 3245b whose outer shape is formed like a pentagram and whose shaft portion 3245a extends rearward from the center. A rotating star frame 3245c, which is attached to the rotating star base 3245b and formed in a plurality of frame shapes along the outer periphery of the rotating star base 3245b, and has a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rotating star frame 3245c And a rotating star lens 3245d disposed between the rotating star base 3245b and having translucency. This star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED 3247a of the star decoration substrate 3247 to emit light in an appropriate color.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 36, the star decoration board 3247 in the star unit 3240 has LEDs 3247a arranged in the vicinity of the outer vertices formed in the shape of a pentagonal star. When the star-shaped decorative body 3245 rotates, the LEDs 3247a face the player side (see FIG. 37D). Accordingly, when the star-shaped decorative body 3245 is rotated in a state where the LED 3247a is caused to emit light, light from some of the LEDs 3247a can be directly irradiated to the player side without passing through the star-shaped decorative body 3245. The glittering feeling of the light emitting decoration can be enhanced by instantly glare the player side.

  The star-shaped decorative body 3248 in the star unit 3240 is smaller than the star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245, is larger than the star-shaped decorative portion 3241b of the star unit base 3241, is formed in a pentagonal frame shape, and has a metallic luster on the surface. A frame portion provided with a plating layer, and a transparent star-shaped lens portion disposed in the frame portion. The star-shaped decorative portion 3248 can be light-decorated by causing the LED 3249a of the upper star-decorating substrate 3249 disposed on the rear side to emit light in an appropriate color.

  The upper movable decorative unit 3200 of this example is attached to the rear side of the star unit base 3241 so that the star rotation drive motor 3242 of the star unit 3240 protrudes rearward as shown in FIGS. The star rotation drive motor 3242 protruding rearward is housed in the housing portion 3211a of the unit base 3211 of the main unit 3210 in the assembled state (see FIG. 31).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 is such that the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 are positioned forward of the star unit 3240 in the assembled state. The star unit 3240 can be concealed (difficult to see) from the player side by the right logo movable ornament 3230 and the left logo movable ornament 3235.

  Next, the movement of the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 will be described. The upper movable decorative body unit 3200 in the back rear unit 3000b of the back unit 3000 of this example rotates the logo drive motors 3212 arranged on the left and right, respectively, so that the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and The left logo movable decorative body 3235 can be moved in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 37A, the upper movable ornament body unit 3200 is moved to a state where the right logo movable ornament 3230 and the left logo movable ornament 3235 are close to each other, that is, to the center in the left-right direction. In the state, the star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245 arranged in the center by the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 is difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, when the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 are close to each other, the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 are in a continuous state, and a specific illustration is omitted. However, the respective logos represented by the right logo movable ornament 3230 and the left logo movable ornament 3235 become one logo so that the player can easily recognize the concept of the gaming machine 1. It has become.

  Then, by rotating the left and right logo drive motors 3212 in different directions, the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 move in directions away from each other (outward direction in the horizontal direction), and the center The star-shaped rotating decoration body 3245 arranged on the player can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 37B). The moving positions of the right logo movable decoration body 3230 and the left logo movable decoration body 3235 are detected by detecting the detection piece 3214b of the left and right sliders 3214 by the slide detection sensor 3220, so that the right logo movable decoration body 3230 and the left logo movable decoration body 3235 are moved. The left and right positions of the body 3235 can be specified.

  Further, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 moves the star unit 3240 supported via the left and right lifting arms 3217 by rotating the star unit lifting drive motors 3216 arranged on the left and right in different directions. Be able to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, when the star unit 3240 is in the raised position, the detection piece 3217a of the lifting arm 3217 is in contact with the upper surface of the lifting stopper 3211b of the unit base 3211. The elevating pins 3218 supported by the elevating arms 3217 are in contact with the outer ends of the long holes 3241a in the star unit base 3241 through the sliding bushes. As a result, the downward movement of the elevating pin 3218 is restricted, and the star unit 3240 can be maintained in the raised position even when the driving force of the star unit elevating drive motor 3216 is not present. ing.

  From this state, when the right star unit lifting drive motor 3216 is rotated counterclockwise and the left star unit lifting drive motor 3216 is rotated clockwise at the same speed in front view, the respective stars are rotated. The left and right lifting arms 3217 fixed to the rotation shaft 3216a of the unit lifting drive motor 3216 rotate in different directions. By the rotation of the left and right star unit elevating drive motor 3216, the elevating pins 3218 supported by the left and right elevating arms 3217 move in the directions approaching each other while sliding in the elongated holes 3241a of the star unit base 3241 in the left and right directions. It moves up with it and moves down after reaching the top dead center. The entire star unit 3240 moves up and down with the vertical movement of the elevating pin 3218. When the left and right lifting pins 3218 reach the bottom dead center, the rotational driving of the star unit lifting drive motor 3216 stops and the star unit 3240 is positioned at the lowered position (see FIG. 37C). .

  When the star unit 3240 is in the lowered position, the entire star unit 3240 is positioned on the upper front surface of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 so that the player can fully see the entire star unit 3240. (See FIG. 48 and the like). When the star unit 3240 is in the lowered position, the left and right star-shaped decorative bodies 3248 are exposed to the player side below the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 as shown in the figure. Thus, the player can sufficiently show the light-emitting decoration by the upper star decoration board 3249 to the player.

  When the star unit 3240 is in the lowered position, the elevating pin 3218 is suspended from the rotation shaft 3216a of the star unit elevating drive motor 3216, so that no rotational moment acts on the rotation shaft 3216a, and the star unit elevating drive motor. The star unit 3240 can be maintained in the lowered position without the driving force 3216.

  In order to raise the star unit 3240 from the lowered position, the star unit elevating drive motor 3216 can be driven to rotate in the opposite direction to the above, and the elevating pin 3218 exceeds the top dead center. Then, the drying unit 3240 can be returned to the raised position by being rotationally driven until the detection piece 3217a of the lifting arm 3217 comes into contact with the upper surface of the lifting stopper 3211b. Note that the rising / lowering position of the star unit 3240 can be specified by detecting the detection piece 3217a of the lifting / lowering arm 3217 by the lifting / lowering detection sensor 3220.

  The star unit 3240 in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 can rotate the star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245 arranged at the center of the front surface by a star rotation driving motor 3242 (see FIG. 37D). reference). The star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245 can be rotated in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction by the star rotation drive motor 3242. The star unit 3240 can rotate the star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245 even when the star unit 3240 is in the raised position, and when the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 are close to each other at the elevated position. But it can be rotated. Further, by detecting the detection piece (not shown) of the driven gear rotated by the star rotation drive motor 3242 by the star rotation detection sensor 3250, the rotational position of the star-shaped rotating decoration body 3245 can be specified. ing.

  As described above, according to the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 of this embodiment, the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be decorated within the frame of the center accessory 2400, and the right logo movable decorative body 3230 that moves in the left-right direction can be used. And the left logo movable decoration body 3235, the star unit 3240 moving up and down, and the rotating star decoration body 3245 can be entertained by the different movements and light-emitting decorations (light-emitting effects). This makes it possible to prevent the interest in games from being reduced.

[Side movable decorative unit]
Next, the side movable decorative body unit 3400 in the back rear unit 3000b will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a front view showing the side movable decorative body unit. FIG. 39 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the side movable decorative body unit.
The side movable decorative body unit 3400 in the back rear unit 3000b of the present embodiment is attached to the lower side of the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 at the upper left and right sides of the opening 621c in the back box body 3100. Body unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically.

  As shown in the figure, the side movable decorative body unit 3400 includes a unit base 3402 attached to the back box body 3100 and a side drive motor fixed to a rear upper part of the unit base 3402 so that the rotation shaft extends forward. 3404 (see FIGS. 28 and 29), a link member (not shown) that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the side drive motor 3404 so as to be integrally rotatable and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation shaft, and the rotation of the link member. A side rotation detection sensor 3408 that detects the moving position and is attached to the unit base 3402, a link pin 3410 that is fixed to the tip of the link member and protrudes forward, and the link pin 3410 is slidably inserted and extends in a predetermined direction. It has a slit 3412a and is eccentric from the rotation axis of the side drive motor 3404 with respect to the unit base 3402. A decorative body base 3412 that is rotatably supported at a position (see Figure 29), and a.

  Further, the side movable decorative body unit 3400 covers the front side of the decorative body base 3412, and is disposed near the front end side opposite to the shaft-supported side, and is disposed on the outer periphery of the large mouth 3414a and the large mouth 3414a. A decorative body main body 3414 having a small opening 3414b having a smaller diameter than the large opening 3414a, a plurality of middle openings 3414c arranged on the base end side supported by a size between the small opening 3414b and the large opening 3414a, and a decorative body main body 3414. The lens member 3416 inserted from the rear side into the large mouth 3414a, the middle mouth 3414c, and the small mouth 3414b, and the lens member 3416 and the decorative body base 3412 are arranged at positions corresponding to the large mouth 3414a and the small mouth 3414b. Side end decorative substrate 3418 on which the LED 3418a is mounted, a lens member 3416, and a decorative body base And a, a side proximal decorative substrate 3420 having a plurality of LED3420a are mounted on the front is arranged in a corresponding position with Nakaguchi 3414c between the scan 3412.

As shown in the figure, the decorative body main body 3414 in the side movable decorative body unit 3400 is configured to extend in the vertical direction, and has a large opening 3414a formed at the center of a rectangular shape at the lower end (tip). Small openings 3414b are formed at the four corners of the outer periphery of the large opening 3414a. In addition, the upper end (base end) of the decorative body main body 3414 includes two circular portions 3414d arranged apart from each other on the left and right sides, and three star portions 3414e arranged below the circular portion 3414d. A plurality of middle openings 3414c are arranged between the star portion 3414e and the large opening 3414a.
As shown in the figure, the decorative body 3414 has a form imitating an illumination stand in which the large mouth 3414a is regarded as a spotlight. The decorative body 3414 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The side movable decorative body unit 3400 is configured such that a decorative body base 3412 is rotatable about a circular portion 3414d disposed on the inner side (center side of the game area 605) of the decorative body main body 3414 with respect to the unit base 3402. The decorative body main body 3414, the lens member 3416, the side distal end decorative board 3418, and the side base end decorative board 3420 are rotated together with the decorative body base 3412. As shown in FIG. 39, the rotation range of the decorative body base 3412 and the like is such that the front ends of the decorative body main body 3414 approach each other from the state where the front end of the decorative body main body 3414 hangs substantially vertically so that the front end is the lower end. It is designed to rotate between an angular range of about 90 degrees toward the direction (inner direction). In the state where the tip of the decorative body main body 3414 hangs down, the left and right side movable decorative body units 3400 are in the retracted position located on the rear side of the back front left decorative member 3030 in the center accessory 2400 or the back front unit 3000a. It is located in a hidden position that is difficult to see from the player side (see FIG. 9 etc.).

  Also. The side movable decorative body unit 3400 causes the LED 3418a of the side distal end decorative board 3418 and the LED 3420a of the side base decorative board 3420 to emit light in appropriate colors, so that the large body 3414a, the middle opening 3414c, The fore edge 3414b can be decorated with light emission. Further, when the decorative body main body 3414 of the side movable decorative unit 3400 is in the retracted position, the LEDs 3418a and 3420a emit light so that the right portion of the center accessory 2400 and the front front left decorative member 3030 are illuminated from the rear side. Be able to.

[Lower movable decorative body unit]
Next, the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 in the back rear unit 3000b will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40 is a rear view of the lower movable decorative body unit with the unit base cover and the rear lifting base removed. 41 is a perspective view of FIG. 40 viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lower movable decorative body unit. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs in the lower movable decorative body unit.

  The lower movable decorative body unit 3600 in the back rear unit 3000b of this embodiment is attached to the back box body 3100 in the vicinity of the lower left and right outer sides of the opening 621c and is a unit base 3602 extending in the vertical direction in a box shape with the rear side open. And a plate-like unit base cover 3604 (see FIG. 29) that closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3602, and a lower lift drive that is mounted near the lower end of the rear surface of the unit base cover 3604 so that the rotating shaft protrudes forward. A motor 3606, a drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotary shaft of the lower lifting drive motor 3606, a first transmission gear 3610 that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3602, A second transmission gear 3612 that meshes with the transmission gear 3610 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3602; A third transmission gear (not shown) fixed to the front side of the two transmission gears 3612, a pinion gear 3616 meshing with the third transmission gear and rotatably supported by the unit base 3602, and a pinion gear An elevating rack 3618 having a rack gear 3618a extending in the vertical direction meshing with 3616, a columnar elevating rail 3620 that supports the elevating rack 3618 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and is mounted in the unit base 3602, and a unit base cover 3604. And a lower lift detection sensor 3622 for detecting a detection piece (not shown) formed at the lower end of the lifting rack 3618.

  Further, the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 has a predetermined amount between a transparent plate-like rear lifting base 3630 (see FIG. 29) and both rear lifting bases 3630 attached to both lifting racks 3618 arranged on the left and right. A transparent plate-like front elevating base 3632 attached to the front surface of the rear elevating base 3630 so as to form a gap between the front elevating base 3632 and the front surface of the front elevating base 3632 attached to the center in the left-right direction. A lower central decorative member 3634 having an opening 3634a, a transparent lens member 3636 (see FIG. 28, etc.) inserted from the rear side into the circular and star-shaped openings 3634a in the lower central decorative member 3634, and a lens member The lower central decorative board 3638 (see FIG. 4), which is disposed between 3636 and the front elevating base 3632 and has a plurality of LEDs 3638a mounted on the front surface. ), A front right wing decoration member 3640 and a front left wing decoration member 3642 (see FIG. 28, etc.) disposed on the left and right sides of the lower central decoration member 3634, and a front right wing decoration member 3640 and a front left wing decoration. A front right wing decoration board 3644 and a front left wing decoration board 3646 (see FIG. 43) are disposed between the member 3642 and the front lifting base 3632 and a plurality of LEDs 3644a and 3646a are mounted on the front surface.

  Further, the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 includes a wing rotation drive motor 3648 and a wing rotation drive motor 3648 that are attached to the front lower portion of the center in the left-right direction of the front lifting base 3632 so that the rotation shaft protrudes backward. A drive gear 3650 which is fixed to the rotation shaft and disposed on the rear side of the front lifting base 3632; a left driven gear 3652 which meshes with the driving gear 3650 and is rotatably supported on the rear side of the front lifting base 3632; A right driven gear 3654 that meshes with the driven gear 3652 and is rotatably supported by the front elevating base 3632 at a position on the right side (left side in the rear view) of the left driven gear 3652, and a right driven gear 3654 having the same diameter as the left driven gear 3652. A fan-shaped rear right wing drive gear 3656 that meshes with 3654 and is rotatably supported by the front elevating base 3632, and the rear right wing drive gear 3656 are the front elevating base 3. 32, a fan-shaped rear left wing drive gear 3658, which is pivotally supported on the opposite side across the center in the left-right direction and meshes with the left driven gear 3652, and a rear right wing drive gear 3656 and a rear left wing drive gear 3658, respectively, rotate together. A transparent rear plate-shaped rear right wing base 3660 and rear left wing base 3662 disposed on the rear side of the elevating base 3632, and a transparent rear surface that is fixed to the front side of the rear right wing base 3660 and the rear left wing base 3662 and has an outer shape formed in a wing shape. The right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 (see FIG. 42C and the like), and the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666, and the rear right wing base 3660 and the rear left wing base 3662, respectively. Transparent rear right wing decorative board 366 on which a plurality of LEDs 3668a and 3670a capable of emitting light toward the front side are mounted And is provided with a rear left-wing decorative substrate 3670, the.

  The lower movable decorative body unit 3600 is attached to the rear side of the front elevating base 3632 and detects a detection piece 3656a of the rear right wing drive gear 3656, and a lower central decorative member 3634 in the front elevating base 3632. A motor cover 3674 (see FIG. 28) that is attached to the lower front surface and covers the front side of the blade rotation drive motor 3648. Further, the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 is disposed below the left and right unit bases 3602, and is attached to the lower surface of the lower relay terminal plate cover and the lower relay board cover 3676 that is attached to the lower inner side of the back box body 3100, respectively. Lower right lower relay terminal plate 3678 and lower left lower relay terminal plate 3680, and lower right upper relay terminal plate 3682 and lower upper left relay terminal plate 3684 attached to the left and right sides near the center on the rear side of the front elevating base 3632. ing. These relay terminal plates 3678, 3680, 3682, 3684 are connected to the drive motors 3606, 3648, the detection sensors 3622, 3672, the decorative boards 3638, 3644, 3646, 3668, 3670, etc., which are provided in the lower movable decorative body unit 3600. In order to relay the connection with the peripheral control board 4140 such as the first lamp driving board 3801 and the second lamp driving board 3802.

  In the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 of this example, a pinion gear 3616 that meshes with a rack gear 3618a of an elevating rack 3618 that is slidable in the vertical direction by an elevating rail 3620 is pivoted at a substantially central position in the vertical direction on the elevating rail 3620. A lower elevating drive motor 3606 that is supported and rotationally drives the pinion gear 3616 is attached near the lower end of the elevating rail 3620, and the lower elevating drive motor 3606 is driven upward by a plurality of transmission gears 3610, 3612, etc. Is transmitted to the pinion gear 3616. Accordingly, the lower lifting drive motor 3606 can be arranged at a position that is not easily noticeable, and the lifting rack 3618 is moved over substantially the entire length of the lifting rail 3620 so that the wing decoration members 3640, 3642, 3664, 3666 are made as much as possible. Can be raised to high.

  The lower movable decorative body unit 3600 includes a drive gear, a first transmission gear 3610, a second transmission gear 3612, and a third transmission in a box-shaped unit base 3602 whose rear end opening is closed by a unit base cover 3604. Since the gear, pinion gear 3616, lifting rack 3618, and lifting rail 3620 are accommodated, dust and the like can be prevented from adhering to the driving parts, and each driving part can be moved favorably. It has become. Further, the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 includes a drive gear 3650, a left driven gear 3652, a right driven gear 3654, a rear right wing drive gear 3656, a rear left wing drive gear 3658, and the like that are arranged and supported on the rear side of the front elevating base 3632. Since the rear side is covered with the rear elevating base 3630, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from adhering to these driving components, and each driving component can move well.

  As shown in FIG. 28 and the like, the front elevating base 3632 of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 is formed with a plurality of three-dimensionally extending radial rays centered on the center of the circular lower central decorative member 3634 on the front surface. In addition, a plurality of radiations emerge depending on how light strikes, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see what is arranged on the rear side of the front elevating base 3632.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the lower central decorative member 3634 of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 includes a star-shaped opening 3634a on the upper side of the circular opening 3634a, and an arc shape on both left and right sides of the star-shaped opening 3634a. Aperture 3634a. The lower central decorative member 3634 is provided with a plurality of relief-shaped star-shaped decorative portions on the front surface and a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface. The lens member 3636 fitted and inserted into the opening 3634a of the lower central decorative portion 3634 from the rear side is not shown in detail, but the surface is a smooth curved surface and a plurality of minute lenses are provided on the back surface. Thus, the light from the lower central decorative substrate 3638 disposed on the rear side of the lens member 3636 can be diffused widely so that the entire opening 3634a can emit light uniformly, and the lens member 3636 is formed. The rear side is not visible.

  Further, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 of the lower movable decoration body unit 3600 are formed in a shape in which the wings are spread, and have a plurality of protrusions extending from the arm side to the wing tip. doing. The front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are not shown in detail, but a plating layer having a metallic luster is provided along the outer periphery in a frame shape, and a metallic luster is provided along the surface. A plated layer having a arabesque pattern is provided to decorate the transparent front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642. The front right wing decoration board 3644 and the front left wing decoration board 3646 arranged on the rear side of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 have a white surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3644a, As shown in FIG. 43, 3646a is arranged along a plurality of protrusions formed on the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642. Note that the front right wing decoration board 3644 and the front left wing decoration board 3646 are opaque, and from the player side, the front right wing decoration board 3644 and the front left wing decoration board 3646 (the front right wing decoration member 3640 in the front lifting base 3632). The rear side of the front left wing decorative member 3642 is not visible.

  Further, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 of the lower movable decoration body unit 3600 are formed in a shape in which the wings are spread, like the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642. And a plurality of protrusions extending from the arm side to the wing tip. Although the rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 are not shown in detail, a plating layer having a metallic luster is provided along the outer periphery in a frame shape, and a metallic luster is provided along the surface. A plated layer having a arabesque pattern is provided to decorate the transparent rear right wing decoration member 3664 and rear left wing decoration member 3666. The rear right wing decoration board 3668 and the rear left wing decoration board 3670 disposed on the rear side of the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are transparent boards so that they are hardly visible from the player side. It has become. Further, the rear right wing base 3660 and the rear left wing base 3662 that support the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666, the rear right wing decoration board 3668, and the rear left wing decoration board 3670 are formed in a transparent plate shape. The rear side (effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400) can be visually recognized from the side through the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666.

  The rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 rotate about the rotation axes of the rear right wing drive gear 3656 and the rear left wing drive gear 3658 supported on the rear side of the lower central decoration member 3634, respectively. The wing rotation drive motor 3648 is simultaneously rotated from the state positioned behind the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 to the state where the free end side is raised and rotated so as to approach each other. It has become.

  The lower movable decorative body unit 3600 of this example has a front right wing decorative member 3640 and a front left wing decorative member 3642 on the lower side of the center accessory 2400 when attached to the game board 4 as shown in FIG. It can be seen from the player side through the transparent gaming panel 600, and the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 decorate the left and right upper sides of the attacker unit 2100 below the center accessory 2400. Can be done. Further, the left and right unit bases 3602 of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 are not visible from the player side.

  Next, the movement of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 will be described. As shown in FIG. 42A, in the lower movable decorative body unit 3600, in the normal state, the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 supported by the elevating rails 3620 in the left and right unit bases 3602 are positioned at the lowered position. Yes. Further, in the normal state, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are positioned in a concealed position immediately behind the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 so that they cannot be seen from the player side. It has become. Further, in the lowered position, the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 are positioned below the center accessory 2400 (see FIG. 9 and the like). ).

  When the lower raising / lowering drive motors 3606 arranged on the left and right sides are simultaneously driven to rotate in different directions from this lowered position, the left and right pinion gears 3616 are rotated and guided to the raising / lowering rails 3620 by the rack gears 3618a engaged with the pinion gears 3616. The lift rack 3618 is lifted, and the lift bases 3630 and 3632 are also lifted when the left and right lift racks 3618 are lifted.

  When the left and right lifting racks 3618 reach the upper end of the lifting rail 3620, the lower lifting drive motor 3606 stops, and the lifting bases 3630 and 3632 stop at the raised position (see FIG. 42B). In this raised position, the lower central decorative member 3634, the front right wing decorative member 3640, and the front left wing decorative member 3642 attached to the front side of the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 are within the frame of the center accessory 2400 (the liquid crystal display device 1400). It is in a state of being positioned above the stage 2410 in front of the display screen (see FIG. 51), and can be clearly seen from the player side.

  In order to lower the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 at the ascending position, the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 can be lowered by rotating the left and right lower elevating drive motors 3606 in the opposite directions to the upward direction, The lower elevating drive motor 3606 is driven until the elevating rack 3618 is detected by the lower elevating detection sensor 3622 to lower the elevating rack 3618. When the lower lift detection sensor 3622 detects the detection piece of the lifting rack 3618, the rotational drive of the lower lifting drive motor 3606 is stopped, and the lifting bases 3630 and 3632 can be returned to the lowered position. Yes.

  On the other hand, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are driven to rotate the wing attached to the front lifting base 3632 from the concealed position located behind the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642. When the motor 3648 is rotated in a predetermined direction, the rear right wing drive gear 3656 and the rear left wing drive gear 3658 pivotally supported near the center in the left-right direction simultaneously rotate in different directions, and the right wing drive gear 3656 and the rear left wing drive gear. The rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 that are supported by the 3658 so as to rotate together are rotated so that the free end sides (the left and right ends of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600) rise and approach. Then, when the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 rotate about 90 degrees, the rotation of the wing rotation drive motor 3648 stops, and the substantially entire rear right wing decoration member 3664 and rear left wing decoration member 3666 are moved forward. The appearance position appears on the upper side of the right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 (see FIG. 42C).

  In the state where the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. The lower wing decorative member 3600 is covered with the right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 so that the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 is conspicuous from the player side. In the example, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are positioned at the appearance position when the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 are in the raised position, but the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 are in the lowered position. Sometimes, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 may be positioned at the appearance position.

  In order to position the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 positioned at the appearance position, the wing rotation drive motor 3648 is rotated in a direction opposite to that at the time of appearance, thereby The front ends of the decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 can be rotated in the direction of moving downward while being separated from each other, and the detection piece 3656a of the right rear wing drive gear 3656 is detected by the wing rotation detection sensor 3672. The blade rotation drive motor 3648 is driven to rotate until Then, when the detection piece 3656a of the right rear wing drive gear 3656 is detected by the wing rotation detection sensor 3672 and the wing rotation drive motor 3648 stops, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are positioned at the concealment position. It is supposed to be in the state.

  Thus, according to the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 of this embodiment, when the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 are in the lowered position, the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are transparent from the lower side of the center accessory 2400. Since the game area 605 can be visually recognized, the LEDs 3644a, the lower central decorative board 3634, the front right wing decorative board 3644, and the front left wing decorative board 3646 can be decorated. By emitting lights 3644a and 3646, the lower side of the center actor 2400 can be decorated with light emission, and the decorations that are not available in the conventional gaming machines can surprise and entertain the player, and the interest in games is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 can illuminate the lower side of the center accessory 2400, the inside of the game area 605 can be made conspicuous and can be greatly differentiated from other game machines. It becomes possible, and it can be set as the game machine 1 which can attract a player's interest strongly.

  Further, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 that have decorated the lower side of the center accessory 2400 appear and move to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 by moving the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 to the raised position. Can surprise the player, attract the player's interest strongly, and the decoration in the game area 605 can change something for the player. It can be thought that it may be, and the expectation of a player can be raised and it can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  Further, since the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 can be rotated to the appearance position in a state where the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 are moved to the raised position, four wing-shaped decorations are provided. The appearance of the members 3640, 3642, 3664, and 3666 can greatly surprise the player, and can expect an effect that can further enhance the interest of the player. Further, since the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is covered with the four wing-shaped decorative members 3640, 3642, 3664, 3666, the player can be entertained. Further, the lower center decorative member 3634, the front right wing decorative member 3640, the front left wing decorative member 3642, the rear right wing decorative member 3664, and the rear left wing with the rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 rotated to the appearance position. The LED 3638a, 3644a, 3646a, 3668a, and 3670a of each of the decoration boards 3638, 3644, 3646, 3668, and 3670 disposed on the rear side of the decoration member 3666 is caused to emit light so that substantially the entire lower movable decoration body unit 3600 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission, and the player can be entertained by dazzling light, and the expectation of the game can be enhanced.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 640 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG.
The function display unit 640 is attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. FIG. 44 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit on the gaming board in a state where it is attached to the gaming machine.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 44, the function display unit 640 is a game state display composed of one LED for displaying a game state that is changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end when viewed from the front. And a first special symbol memory display 643 for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of the game ball to the first start port 2101, which is composed of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game state display 647, From the one 7-segment LED for displaying the first special lottery result arranged as the first special symbol, which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 643 and is drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2101 The first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol displayed on the right side of the first special symbol display 641 are selected by receiving a game ball at the second starting port 2102. A second special symbol display 642 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying another lottery result as a second special symbol, and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the second special symbol display 642 And a second special symbol memory display 644 for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of the game ball in the second start port 2102.

  The function display unit 640 includes four LEDs that are arranged in a circular arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail from directly above the second special symbol display 642 and display the number of reserves related to the passage of the gate 2302 by the game ball. A normal symbol memory display 646 and a normal LED which is arranged below the normal symbol memory display and displays a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate 2302 as a normal symbol. The number of repetitions of the open / close pattern of the grand prize winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, arranged side by side on the upper right side of the symbol display unit 645 and the normal symbol storage display unit 646 (round) And a round indicator 648 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number).

  The gaming status indicator 647 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and various gaming statuses (in combination with lighting / flashing) For example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  The first special symbol memory display 643 starts the variable display when a game ball is received at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 641 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. Is the number of reserved (stored) numbers of the first special symbol that is held (stored). The first special symbol memory indicator 643 has a first special symbol memory lamp 643a and a first special symbol memory lamp 643b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 643a and 643b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off when the number of reserves is 1, and the first special symbol memory lamps 643a and 643b when the number of reserves is two. When the number of holds is 3, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit. When the number of held is 4, the first special symbol memory lamps 643a and 643b are both It is blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The second special symbol memory display 644 starts the variable display when a game ball is received at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 642 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. Is displayed (the number of storage) of the second special symbol that has been held (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 644 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 644a and a second special symbol memory lamp 644b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 644a and 644b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned off when the number of reserved is 1, and the second special symbol memory display lamp 644a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b lights, and when the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 644a and 644b are turned on. Both are blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The first special symbol indicator 641 and the second special symbol indicator 642 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game balls to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after it fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special The lottery result can be recognized by the player.

  The normal symbol display 645 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. A normal lottery result drawn by passing a ball can be displayed. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display unit 645 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined time similarly to the special symbol.

  When the normal symbol display unit 646 cannot display the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 645, when the game ball passes through the gate 2302, the start of the variable display is held (stored). The number of holds (stored number) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 646 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 646a to 646d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 646a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 646d, it is possible to display the number of ordinary symbols held. In the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  The round indicator 648 includes a two-round display lamp 648a made of predetermined LEDs and a 15-round display lamp 648b, and the number of rounds in the “big hit” game can be displayed by lighting each lamp. It is like that.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the function display unit 640 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the gaming machine 1. . Game state indicator 647, first special symbol memory indicator 643, first special symbol indicator 641, second special symbol indicator 642, second special symbol memory indicator 644, normal symbol memory indicator 646, normal symbol indicator The device 645 and the round display device 648 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 640.

  In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 640 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared to the case where the function display unit 640 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 600, The function display unit 640 can be used as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, the configuration related to the gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the gaming machine 1 (table unit 2000) The position of the function display unit 640 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the gaming machine 1 is different. For example, the position of the function display unit 640 can be recognized without confusion.

[Various substrates on the back of the back box]
Next, various substrates attached to the rear surface of the back box body 3100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 45. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional plan view of the back box body cut along with the peripheral board box. In the game board of the present embodiment, a plurality of boards connected to a main control board 4100 described later are attached to the rear surface of the back box body 3100. Specifically, on the rear surface of the back box main body 3100, a first lamp driving board 3801 that is mounted horizontally below the opening 621c in the back box main body 3100 and a rear surface of the first lamp driving board 3801 are covered. A box-shaped lamp driving board box 3804 fixed to 3100, and a second lamp driving board 3802 attached to the front surface of the rear wall in the lamp driving board box 3804 so as to face the first lamp driving board 3801. Yes.

  The first lamp driving board 3801 and the second lamp driving board 3802 are connected to each decoration board, a drive motor that moves the movable decoration body, a detection sensor, and the like provided in the game board 4, and the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is connected to a peripheral control board 4140 attached to the rear side, and drives each decorative board and drive motor based on an output signal from the peripheral control board 4140 according to a control command from the main control board 4100. . As shown in the figure, the first lamp driving board 3801 and the second lamp driving board 3802 are supported by the lamp driving board box 3804 so as to face each other, and the rear space in the back box body 3100 is effectively utilized. Can be done.

  Further, on the rear side of the back box body 3100, it is attached to the left side (right side in the rear view) of the lamp driving board box 3804, the first start port sensor 3080, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, and the general winning port. The sensor 3081, the gate sensor 2304, the start port solenoid 2121, the attacker solenoid 2124, the magnetic detection sensor 3044, and the peripheral control board 4140 and the panel relay board 3806 for relaying the connection between the main control board 4100 are provided.

  Further, on the rear side of the back box body 3100, a right relay terminal plate 3808 and a left relay terminal plate 3810 that are attached to the left and right sides of the rear surface of the rear wall 621b are provided. The right relay terminal plate 3808 and the left relay terminal plate 3810 are the decorative boards of the attacker unit 2100, the side decorative member 2200, the front front unit 3000b, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200, the side movable decorative body 3400, and the lower movable decorative body 3600. 2114, 2129, 2206, 2430, 2432, 2434, 3024, 3025, 3035, 3036, 3043, 3233, 3238, 3247, 3249, 3418, 3420, 3638, 3664, 3646, 3668, 3670, drive motor 3212, 3216, Relay for connection between 3242, 3404, 3606, 3648, detection sensors 3220, 3221, 3250, 3408, 3622, 3672, etc., and first lamp driving board 3801 and second lamp driving board 3802 A.

[Luminous decoration on game board]
Next, the light emission decoration in the game board 4 of this embodiment is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a front view showing the positions of main decorative boards on the game board. As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of decorative boards capable of emitting light on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and various light-emitting decorations based on control signals from the peripheral control board 4140. (Light emission effect) can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment includes a lower left arc decoration board 2206 of the side decoration member 2200, a right arc decoration board 2430 of the center accessory 2400, and an upper arc decoration board 3024 of the back front upper decoration member 3020. The upper left arc decoration board 3035 of the left front decoration member 3030 is disposed along the inner periphery of the game area 605, and the right arc decoration board 2430 is positioned at the right end of the game area 605 and the lower left arc decoration board 2206 and the upper left. The arc decoration board 3035 can light-decorate the left end of the game area 605 and the upper arc decoration board 3024 can arc-decimate the upper end of the game area 605, respectively.

  Further, in the gaming board 4, the first start of the attacker unit 2100 is performed at the lower center in the left and right direction in the game area 605 with the attacker side decorative board 2114 of the attacker unit 2100 and the lower arc decorative board 3043 of the lower front lower decorative member 3040. It is arranged so as to surround the mouth 2101, the second start opening 2102, and the big prize opening 2103, and the attacker side decoration board 2114 and the lower arc decoration board 3043 can decorate the lower end of the game area 605 in a circular arc shape. It is like that. By making these decorative substrates 2114, 2206, 2430, 3025, 3035, 3043 emit light, the substantially circular gaming region 605 can be illuminated in a ring shape, and a luminous decoration that attracts the player's attention is obtained. Can be done.

  In addition, each LED 2114a, 2206a, 2430a, 3025a, 3035a, 3043a mounted on the decorative board 2114, 2206, 2430, 3025, 3035, 3043 has an opaque arabesque pattern arranged on the front side as shown in the figure. The decorative parts 2205, 2420, 3021, 3031 and 3041 are arranged so that a part of the decorative parts 2205, 2420, 3021, 3031 and 3041 is seen from the front, while avoiding giving the player intense glare. The player can be surprised by the light emission and attract the player's attention strongly.

  In addition, since a part of each LED 2114a, 2206a, 2430a, 3025a, 3035a, 3043a covers the arabesque-shaped decorative portions 2205, 2420, 3021, 3031 and 3041, the player's eye position moves. , LED 2114a, 2206a, 2430a, 3025a, 3035a, 3043a and the decorations 2205, 2420, 3021, 3031, 3041 change, and the light from LEDs 2114a, 2206a, 2430a, 3025a, 3035a, 3043a blinks. It looks like it is sparkling and can entertain the player.

  In addition, as shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a circular right circular decorative portion 2421 and a left circular decorative portion 3032 at the left and right ends near the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in front view. The LEDs 2432a and 3036a of the right circular decorative substrate 2432 and the left circular decorative substrate 3036 disposed on the rear side of the right circular decorative portion 2421 and the left circular decorative portion 3032 are caused to emit light so that the right circular decorative portion 2421 and the left circular decorative portion are illuminated. The portions 3032 can be individually decorated with light emission. By decorating the right circular decorative portion 2421 and the left circular decorative portion 3032 with light emission, it is possible to give an accent to the light emission decoration of the entire game board 4 and to provide a light emission effect that is hard to get tired of. Yes. In addition, the right circular decorative portion 2421 and the left circular decorative portion 3032 are light-decorated together with the arc-shaped decorative portions 2205, 2420, 3021, 3031 and 3041 described above, so that the light-emitting decoration along the inner periphery of the game area 605 is provided. It can be made closer to a ring.

  In the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 of the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 are centered on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The right logo decoration board 3233 and the left logo decoration board, which are arranged at positions that can be seen from the player side through the frame of the accessory 2400, are arranged on the rear side of the right logo movable decoration body 3230 and the left logo movable decoration body 3235. The right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 can be light-decorated by causing the LEDs 3233a and 3238a of the 3238 to emit light, and the concept of the gaming machine 1 is given to the player by brightening the logo. Can make it easier to recognize the game and make it seem that a chance has come to the game. Can be, interest in the game to increase the player's expectation is made to be able to be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 of the lower movable decoration body unit 3600 visible through the transparent game panel 600 below the center accessory 2400. The front right wing decoration board 3644 and the front left wing decoration board 3646 disposed on the rear side of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 are provided on the lower side of the center accessory 2400. The region on the upper left and right sides can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 raises the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 so that the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are placed in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 within the frame of the center accessory 2400. In this state, the LEDs 3644a and 3646a of the front right wing decoration board 3644 and the front left wing decoration board 3646 are caused to emit light, so that the wing-like decoration members 3640 and 3642 are illuminated and decorated in the center accessory 2400. It is possible to provide a light-emitting decoration that can attract the attention of a person.

  In the state where the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 are raised, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are further rotated to appear above the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642, and the rear right wing The LED 3668a and 3670a of the rear right wing decoration board 3668 and the rear left wing decoration board 3670 disposed on the rear side of the decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are caused to emit light, so that four of them spread within the frame of the center accessory 2400. The wing-shaped decoration members 3640, 3642, 3664, and 3666 are decorated with light emission, and the wings that shine brilliantly can attract the player's interest very strongly, and there is a strong expectation that something good will happen. So that you can fully expect the effect of enhancing the interest of the player. Going on.

  In the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, the decorative members 3020, 3030, and 3040 of the back front unit 3000a in the back unit 3000 are arranged on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 600, and the decorative members 3020, 3030, When each of the decorative substrates 3024, 3035, 3036, and 3043 that causes the light emitting decoration 3040 to emit light, the light is reflected by the game panel 600 to the surface side of the decorative members 3020, 3030, and 3040, and the decorative members 3020 and 3030 are reflected. , 3040 can be made to shine brilliantly.

  Further, in the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, the front surface of the gaming board 4 is closed by the transparent glass plate 452 of the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5, so that each of the decorative boards provided in the gaming board 4 The light is reflected by the glass plate 452 to illuminate the surface of each decorative member provided in the game board 4, and the surface of each decorative member can be shined.

  Furthermore, as described above, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of star-shaped decorative portions 2422, 3023, 3034, 3070, 3219, 3241b having various surfaces and a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface. It is equipped with light from each decoration board, light from other game machines, or light from the lighting in the game hall where the game machine 1 is installed. The board 4 can give the player an impression that is different from conventional gaming machines at a glance, and the gaming machine 1 can be selected as the gaming machine 1 to play. It is like that.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a plurality of LEDs 453a that can irradiate light toward the inside of the gaming window on the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5 that closes the front surface of the gaming board 4. The light from the 450 LEDs 453a is reflected on the surface of each decorative member in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, so that the inside of the game area 605 can be shone.

[Moving decoration on game board]
Next, the movable decoration (movable effect) in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. 47 is a front view showing the movement of the upper movable decorative body unit on the game board, FIG. 48 is a front view showing the movement of the upper movable decorative body unit following FIG. 47, and FIG. It is a front view which shows the motion of a decoration body unit. FIG. 50 is a front view showing the movement of the side movable decorative body on the game board. 51 is a front view showing the movement of the lower movable decorative body in the game board, and FIG. 52 is a front view showing the movement of the lower movable decorative body following FIG. As described above, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are movable on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and various movable bodies are provided based on control signals from the peripheral control board 4140. Decoration (movable effects) can be performed.

  In the gaming board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 are in contact with each other within the frame of the center accessory 2400 above the liquid crystal display device 1400. Are in a state of being lined up in the left-right direction. In this state, when the left and right logo drive motors 3212 supported by the unit base 3211 of the main body unit 3210 in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 are driven to rotate in different directions, the logo drive gear 3213 together with the rotation shaft of the logo drive motor 3212. And the slider 3214 slides away from each other by the rack gear 3214a meshing with the logo drive gear 3213.

  As a result, the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235 respectively supported by the left and right sliders 3214 move in directions away from each other, and the star unit 3240 disposed on the rear side rotates in a star shape. As shown in FIG. 47, the decorative body 3245 becomes visible from the player side. As described above, the left and right logo movable decorative bodies 3230 and 3235 move in directions away from each other, and the star-shaped rotational decorative body 3245 appears on the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 1400. We can expect arrival, and can suppress that interest for game declines.

  In the game board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 47, the left and right logo movable decorative bodies 3230 and 3235 in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 move in directions away from each other, and the star shape in the rear star unit 3240 When the pair of star unit lifting / lowering drive motors 3216 supported by the unit base 3211 are rotated in different directions in the state where the rotating ornament 3245 appears, the lifting / lowering fixed to the rotating shaft 3216a of the star unit lifting / lowering driving motor 3216 is performed. The arms 3217 are rotated in different directions (the lifting arm 3217 on the right side when viewed from the front is in the counterclockwise direction and the lifting arm 3217 on the left side is in the clockwise direction). The star unit 3240 supported via the elevating pin 3218 attached to the elevating plate moves (elevates). Going on.

  The lift pins 3218 attached to the lift arms 3217 are in a state of being slightly turned from the top dead center in the initial state (in the raised position), and are once temporarily driven by the rotation of the star unit lift drive motor 3216. Then, after rotating to the top dead center, it moves on the circumference of a predetermined diameter around the rotation axis of the star unit lifting drive motor 3216 toward the bottom dead center. Therefore, the star unit 3240 supported by the pair of lifting arms 3217 is once lifted slightly and then lowered by the rotational drive of the star unit lifting drive motor 3216. When the elevating pin 3218 attached to the elevating arm 3217 reaches the bottom dead center, the rotational drive of the star unit elevating drive motor 3216 is stopped, and the star unit 3240 is positioned at the lowered position.

  When the star unit 3240 is located at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 48, the star unit 3240 is located at the upper portion of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The star-shaped decorative bodies 3248 arranged one by one appear on the lower side of the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235. Thus, the appearance of the entire star unit 3240 at the top of the liquid crystal display device 1400 changes the decoration state in the game area 605, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest and make it difficult to get bored. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel a chance is coming, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In this game board 4, when the star rotation drive motor 3242 supported on the rear side of the star unit 3240 is rotated in a predetermined direction with the star unit 3240 positioned at the lowered position as shown in FIG. A large star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245 arranged in the center of the front surface of the unit 3240 is rotated in a predetermined direction (see FIG. 49). This rotation of the star-shaped decorative body 3245 can attract the player's interest strongly, so that the player may think that there is something good and increase the expectation of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 49, each LED 3247a of the star decoration board 3247 arranged on the rear side of the star-shaped rotating decoration body 3245 is caused to emit light while the star-shaped rotating decoration body 3245 of the star unit 3240 is rotated. The star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since the rotating star-shaped decorative body 3245 rotates, the light from each LED 3247a can be instantaneously blocked by the rotating star frame 3245c, so that the light from the LED 3247a can be blinked, and a glittering light emitting decoration can be obtained. Can be done. Further, the LED 3247a disposed near each vertex of the pentagonal star shape on the star decoration substrate 3247 directly to the player side without passing through the star rotation decoration body 3245 according to the rotation position of the star rotation decoration body 3245. Since the light can be irradiated, the glittering feeling of the light emitting decoration can be enhanced by instantly glare the player side.
Therefore, by decorating the star unit 3240 with light emission, it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and together with the rotation of the star-shaped rotating decoration body 3245, the player is entertained and the interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes the side movable decorative body units 3400 on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the rear side of the center accessory 2400 and the front front unit 3000a, respectively. Then, the free end side of the decorative body main body 3414 is in a suspended state, and as shown in FIG. 48 and the like, the side movable decorative body unit 3400 cannot be seen from the player side. In this state, when the side drive motor 3404 in the side movable decorative body unit 3400 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction, the decorative body main body 3414 formed in a spotlight shape rotates, and the large mouth 3414a is opened as shown in FIG. The front end side that has appeared appears in the frame of the center accessory 2400 in a front view so that the player can be entertained. It should be noted that the decorative body main body 3414 of the side movable decorative body unit 3400 arranged on the left and right can move independently on the left and right.

  The side movable decorative body unit 3400 can illuminate the decorative body main body 3414 by causing the LEDs 3418a and 3420a of the side distal end decorative board 3418 and the side base end decorative board 3420 to emit light. Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device with the decorative body main body 3414 of the side movable decorative body unit 3400 appearing on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and at least the LED 3418a of the side tip decorative substrate 3418 is caused to emit light. On the display screen 1400, an effect image can be displayed as if spotlight light is emitted from the large opening 3414a of the decorative body main body 3414. The decorative main body 3414 of the side movable decorative body unit 3400 can be displayed. It is possible to entertain the production image together with the movement of the.

  In the normal state, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 of the lower movable decoration body unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 as shown in FIG. It is located at a lower position below the inside of the frame, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 600, and is a decorative member for decorating the lower side of the center accessory 2400. The lower movable decorative body unit 3600 is configured such that, when the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are in the lowered position, the lower elevating drive motors 3606 arranged on the left and right are respectively driven to rotate in different predetermined directions. The rear elevating base 3630 and the front elevating base 3632 that support the right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are raised.

  Then, the front right wing decoration member 3640, the front left wing decoration member 3642, and the like rise from the lower side of the center accessory 2400 to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 within the frame of the center accessory 2400, as shown in FIG. When the upper ends of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 are raised to the vicinity of the approximate center in the vertical direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the rotational drive of the pair of lower elevating drive motors 3606 is stopped, and the rear elevating base 3630 and The front lifting base 3632 stops at the raised position. When the rear elevating base 3630 and the front elevating base 3632 are in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 51, the lower center decorative member 3634, the front right wing decorative member 3640, and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2400. In addition, the front surface of the front elevating base 3632 facing from the lower side of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 is also positioned in the frame of the center accessory 2400.

  The front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 rise and appear in the frame of the center accessory 2400, so that the decoration mode in the game area 605 is greatly changed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is like that. Further, in this state, the LEDs 3638a of the lower center decorative board 3638, the front right wing decorative board 3644, and the front left wing decorative board 3646 disposed on the rear side of the lower central decorative member 3634, the front right wing decorative member 3640, and the front left wing decorative member 3642, By illuminating 3644a and 3646a, the wings that spread widely to the left and right within the frame of the center accessory 2400 can be illuminated with glitter, which attracts the player's interest and lowers the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Note that a rear decorative plate 3106 is disposed at a position below the frame of the center accessory 2400 and on the rear side of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600. When the decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are raised, the back decorative plate 3106 having a predetermined decoration on the surface can be seen from the player side through the transparent game panel 600 below the center accessory 2400. Thus, it is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the entire game board 4 from being lowered.

  The gaming board 4 of this example is a wing rotation drive supported by the front lifting base 3632 in a state where the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 are located at the raised position together with the rear lifting base 3630 and the front lifting base 3632. When the motor 3648 is driven to rotate, a pair of rear right wing decoration members 3664 and rear left wings disposed between the front elevating base 3632 and the rear elevating base 3630 on the rear side of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642. The decorative member 3666 rotates about the center side of the game area 605 so that the left and right tip sides rise, and the rear right wing can be seen from the player side above the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642. A decorative member 3664 and a rear left wing decorative member 3666 appear.

  When the left and right ends of the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are rotated up to the vicinity of the upper end of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the rotational drive of the wing rotation drive motor 3648 is stopped. In a state where the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 appear above the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642, as shown in FIG. 52, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642, the rear right wing decorative member 3664, and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 cover most of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the appearance of four wing-shaped decorative members greatly surprises the player. It is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  The lower right decorative member 3634, the front right wing decorative member 3640, and the front left wing decorative member with the rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 appearing above the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642. 3642, rear right wing decoration member 3664 and rear left wing decoration member 3666, lower central decoration board 3638 disposed on the rear side, front right wing decoration board 3644 and front left wing decoration board 3646, rear right wing decoration board 3668 and rear left wing decoration board 3670 By making each LED 3638a, 3644a, 3646a, 3668a, 3670a emit light, the frame of the center accessory 2400, that is, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be brilliantly brilliantly decorated. I can be entertained and entertained, as well as against games It has become possible to heighten the sense of expectation.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the game board 4 of this example, the movable decorative bodies of the upper movable decorative body unit 3200, the side movable decorative body unit 3400, and the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 are appropriately combined. It can also be moved, and it can be made hard to get tired by showing the player a variety of movable effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[Main board / Peripheral board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 includes a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress), and a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral board 4010 group includes a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. And a liquid crystal control board 4150 for controlling image display.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 53, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 646a. The main control MPU 4100a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 3080 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101, a second start port sensor 2127 for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102, and a part thereof Detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3081 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or the magnetic detection sensors attached to the gate sensor 2304, the general winning opening sensor 3081, the count sensor 2128, and the back unit 3000, respectively. A detection signal from 3044 is input via the panel relay board 3086 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start-up solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid 2124 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3086, or the main control I / O. First special symbol display 641, second special symbol display 642, first special symbol storage display 643, second special symbol storage display 644, normal via port 4100b, panel relay board 3086, function display board 640a A drive signal is output to the symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the game state display 647, and the round display 648.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to games (game information), various commands related to payout, etc. to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107 described above, and gaming machines from this payout control board 1186 Various commands relating to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the gaming machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). Although the detailed description will be given later, the main control MPU 4100a, when receiving various commands related to the state of the gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 1136, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various types of information in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 646a of the main control board 4100 is operated at power-on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 646a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 53, a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the firing solenoid 654 described above, and the above. The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 53, a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 1186, a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 744 described above, It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a, which will be described in detail later, receives various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, and operates the RAM clear switch 646a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the input of a signal (detection signal), a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input, or the detection signals from the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751 and the rotation angle switch 752 are relay terminals in the prize ball unit Or input via the plate 830.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 744 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d discharges (removes) the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 described above based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a driving signal is output to the payout motor 744 or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the payout motor is based on the ball rental request signal. A drive signal is output from the drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 744, or a full switch When the detection signal from 50 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 744 stops driving signal to the payout motor 744 from payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the detection signal.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the gaming machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 751. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 and the game information of the gaming machine 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the firing solenoid 654 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 654 based on the clock signal, and a drive signal is output to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c. And a firing motor drive circuit 4120d. The firing control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 654 so that approximately 99.95 gaming balls per minute are fired toward the gaming area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmitting circuit 4120b. .
That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 described above is controlled.

  As described above, the handle device 500 described above includes the touch switch 516 and the firing stop switch 518. When the touch operation member of the operation handle is touched, it is detected by the touch switch 516, and a single button is pressed. When operated, it is detected by a firing stop switch 518. Although these detection signals will be described in detail later, they are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, a CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 646a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 53, a peripheral control board 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral board 4010 performs a peripheral sound control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored are configured.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the various commands. The door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5 is sent to the lamp driving board 4160 having the first lamp driving board 3801 and the second lamp driving board 3802. A game board side lighting / flashing command that outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of each light emitting decoration board 3606 provided in the game board 4 is output to the lamp driving board 4160, or provided in the game board 4 Logo drive motor 3212, star unit lift drive motor 3216, star rotation drive motor 3242, side drive motor Control signal (sound information to be output from the sound ROM 4140d) or a game board side motor drive command to output a rotation drive signal to the motor 3404, the lower elevation drive motor 3606, and the wing rotation drive motor 3648 Sound command) is output to the sound source IC 4140c, or a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is output to the liquid crystal control board 4150.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, door frame side motor driving command, game board side motor driving command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 4160. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 4160 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the LEDs such as decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. Based on the received game board side lighting / flashing command, the decorative board 2114, 2129, 2206, 2430, 2432, 2434, 3024, 3025, 3035, 3036, 3043, provided on the gaming board 4 is turned on or off. 3233, 3238, 3247, 3249, 3418, 3420, 3638, 3664, 3646, 3668 and 3670. In addition, the lamp driving board 4160 receives a rotation drive signal based on the received game board side motor drive command, a logo drive motor 3212 provided in the game board 4, a star unit elevating drive motor 3216, a star rotation drive motor 3242, a side drive. Output to the motor 3404, the lower lift drive motor 3606, and the blade rotation drive motor 3648.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes a right logo movable decorative body 3230, a left logo movable decorative body 3235, a star unit 3240, a star-shaped rotational decorative body 3245, and a side movable decorative body unit in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 of the game board 4. 3400, the elevating bases 3630 and 3632 (front right wing movable decoration member 3640 and front left wing movable decoration member 3644), rear right wing movable decoration member 3664 and rear left wing movable decoration member 3666 of the lower movable decoration body unit 3600. Detection signals from detection sensors 3220, 3221, 3250, 3408, 3622, and 3672 that respectively detect the movable positions are input via the lamp driving substrate 4160, and the right logo movable decoration is based on these detection signals. Body 3230, left logo movable ornament 3235 The positions of the star unit 3240, the star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245, the decorative body main body 3414 of the side movable decorative body unit 3400, the lift bases 3630 and 3632, the rear right wing movable decorative member 3664, and the rear left wing movable decorative member 3666 are grasped. .

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from a rotation detection sensor that detects a rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor (button sensor) that detects an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the sub-drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board. 4160. A drive signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the dial drive motor 414 and the light emitting devices 490, 492, and 494 via the lamp drive board 4160 and the sub drawer relay board 1108.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 130 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 via the lamp driving substrate 4160 and the auxiliary drawer relay substrate 1108. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow.

  The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and the external WDT together. It is diagnosed whether the system of the MPU 4140a is running out of control.

[LCD control board]
Next, a liquid crystal control board 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral board 4010, as illustrated, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, and a liquid crystal control that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data. ROM 4150b, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the above-described liquid crystal display device 1400, character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the display command is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later. Then, the VDP 4150c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 4150e. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  Upon receiving a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data (to be described later) from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. This is the output method.

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is affected.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a unit. For example, when various kinds of people are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

Note that the sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally.
Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is driven by a main scan for setting a state and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction crossing one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b performs the main scanning on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the drawing data for one line. Are sequentially output from the left to the right for pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, liquid crystal display is performed as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. In order from the left to the right of the device 1400, the data is output to pixels for one line.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes a backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter substrate 1411.

[Game contents]
The game content in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be specifically described. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle portion arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game ball is started by being driven into the upper part of the game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the panel 600. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2400 depending on the driving strength. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle, and the game ball can be driven stronger as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Also, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 600 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2400 flows down from the left and right sides to the upper shelf 2404 of the center accessory 2400, the upper shelf 2404 moves to the left area of the center accessory 2400. It is induced. When the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2400 enters and passes through the gate 2302 of the gate member 2300 disposed on the left side of the center accessory 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2304, the game signal is based on the detection signal. In the main control board 4100, a normal random number is generated. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 is displayed in a variable manner (the normal symbol display 645 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green, and orange), A normal symbol based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds to 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 645 emits light in either red or green). Is done.
The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4204.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 645 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 645 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 are expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102.

  Note that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start port 2102 may be changed according to a special random number and a symbol random number (special lottery result) to be described later. When "short time per hour (including low probability short time per hour, high probability short time per hour, etc.)" is extracted as a random number and a design random number (special lottery result), the fluctuation time and expansion time are changed to a short time. You may do it. Specifically, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table used when selecting the normal symbol fluctuation pattern in the non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state) and in the time-short state (low probability time-short state, high probability time-short state) The normal symbol variation pattern table to be used when selecting the normal symbol variation pattern is selected according to the game state, and the normal symbol variation pattern is selected based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern table, so that it is easily changed. be able to.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present example, an area where a game ball can flow down from the center in the left-right direction is provided on the upper side of the center accessory 2400, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 605. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2400 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate 2302 or the warp entrance 2405. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Accordingly, the player plays the game by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle as appropriate so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2400. It is possible to prevent a game operation such as driving strongly and entertain a game by operating the operation handle portion of the gaming machine 1 and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2304 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 645 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol being changed is stopped and generated / extracted first. Until the result of the normal random number is determined, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2304 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on a normal symbol storage display 646. The normal symbol memory display 646 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the number of LEDs that are lit. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2304 is discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 and have flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2400 are moved toward the center of the game area 605 below the center accessory 2400 by the shelf 2102 of the side decoration member 2100. It has become. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 arranged below the center accessory 2400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3081, the main control board 4100 pays out a payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball unit 700 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are transferred to the upper plate 301. To be paid out.

  If a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general prize opening 2104, the first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, and the big prize opening 2103, the game area 605 It is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 2104, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, or the big winning port 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 605. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2400 enters the warp inlet 2405 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2400, the game ball is supplied to the first stage 2411 on the rear side of the stage 2410 of the center accessory 2400. It has come to be. The game ball supplied onto the first stage 2411 rolls on the first stage 2411 in the left-right direction, is released forward, and is supplied onto the second stage 2412. Also in the second stage 2412, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction and is released into the game area 605 above the attacker unit 2100. When a game ball is released from the center of the second stage 2412 in the stage 2410 into the game area 605, the first start port 2101 is received with a high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3080, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the gaming machine 1 of this example, the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the big prize opening 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2410 are It has a high probability to be received at the first start port 2101 and the like, and when the second start port 2102 and the big prize opening 2103 can be received, there is a high possibility that the game ball will be received when it is released from the stage 2410. Therefore, not only the first start port 2101 but also the second start port 2102 and the big prize opening 2103 can be expected to have an expectation regarding the acceptance of the game balls, thereby enhancing the interest.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate 2302 of the gate member 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2304 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above, a pair of closing the second start port 2102 is closed. When the movable piece 2105 is expanded for a predetermined time to be able to win a prize, and when the prize can be won, when the game ball is received by the second start port 2102 and detected by the second start port sensor 2127, the main control board A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball unit 700 via 4100 or the like.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3080 and the second start port sensor 2127, the first start port The mouth 2101 generates and extracts predetermined first special random numbers and first symbol random numbers, and the second start port 2102 generates and extracts predetermined second special random numbers and second symbol random numbers. Then, based on the extracted special random number and symbol random number, after the variable symbol display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 and second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 is started. The special symbols corresponding to the extracted special random numbers and symbol random numbers are stopped and displayed as special lottery results. In the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. When a big hit game state occurs, the game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be obtained. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (eg, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball unit 700.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passage of the game ball to the gate 2302. When the special symbol is variably displayed or when the special symbol such as the big hit gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is awarded to the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the first start port sensor 3080 and the second start port sensor When detected at 2127, the first special random number and the first special random number extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3080 and the second start port sensor 2127 until the special symbol variation display becomes possible. The design random number, the second special random number and the second design random number are stored and the display thereof is suspended. The stored special random number and the number of the design random numbers are stored in the first special design memory.示器 643 and adapted to display at the second special symbol memory indicator 644.

  Each of the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. When the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number and symbol random number are discarded. Further, the second special random number and the second symbol random number are executed (digested) with priority over the first special random number and the first symbol random number. That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2102 is executed (digested) with priority over the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2101.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection by the first start port sensor 3080 and the second start port sensor 2127 and the special random number of the second special random number are determined in advance as a hit determination table. By collating, it is determined whether the special random number is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit”, and based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3080 and the second start port sensor 2127. The “big hit” is either “2R big hit” or “15R big hit” by comparing the first design random number or the second design random number extracted with the symbol determination table determined in advance. Heel, "perpendicular per short time (high probability non-short per short)" "perpendicular per change (per short high probability time)", "short per time (low probability short time per short)" Any of If, so that also is determined.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (the special lottery result) is “small hit”. In this case, the main control board 4100 opens and closes an opening / closing pattern that closes the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in an open state for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) (for example, 2 times), a small hit gaming state that allows a game ball to be awarded to the big winning opening 2103 is generated.

  On the other hand, when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 and then opens a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds). ) Or an opening / closing pattern that closes the opening / closing member 2106 when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2103 when any of the winning conditions is satisfied. Is repeated a predetermined number of times (the number of predetermined rounds), and if it is “2R big hit”, it is repeated for 2 rounds, and if it is “15R big hit”, it is repeated for 15 rounds, which is advantageous to the player. A state is generated. In addition, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, “high probability short-time per hit” is a high-probability per-hour determination table in which the probability of determining a big hit is improved over the low-probability time-per-hour determination table that is compared with a special random number at a low probability. It is supposed to be exchanged for.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the second special random number, In addition to the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 variably displayed according to the second symbol random number (depending on the special lottery result), the liquid crystal display device 1400 also The effect image corresponding to the special random number and the design random number (special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a series of decorative symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three columns of left, middle, and right decorative symbols). When the variable display is started, then it is sequentially stopped (in this example, it is stopped in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol), and finally all decorative symbol sequences are stopped and displayed. The determination result of the special random number and the symbol random number extracted by the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, the first special symbol and the second special symbol change stop mode (the first special symbol stop symbol and the second special symbol stop symbol) corresponds to the decorative symbol stop symbol, special lottery by starting prize Depending on the result, after a plurality of decorative symbol sequences are variably displayed, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest a special lottery result is displayed. Specifically, if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a mode indicating that the variation stop mode is a big hit, the stop symbol indicating that the decorative symbol is also a big hit (a big hit symbol) ; In this example, if the 15R big hit, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all displayed in the same pattern, the 15R big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. 2R jackpot symbol of a combination including two or more types of symbols determined is displayed). Since the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 641 and 642, generally, the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. We will pay attention to the decorative pattern.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of decorative symbol sequences are variably displayed, the decorative symbol (in this example, left decorative symbol and There is a “reach effect image” that is displayed so that the combination of the right decorative symbol) satisfies a specific condition (reach; the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped with the same symbol). As a special lottery result in which “” is displayed, there are “per reach” and “reach lose”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image” and displays the remaining decorative symbol sequence that is variably displayed after the reach display. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only an effect display relating to the start winning prize but also a “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 53). The variation display of decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. It has become. As a result, the variation display of the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, so that a certain lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is related. With respect to one command, a plurality of decorative pattern variation patterns can be prepared in advance to increase the decorative pattern variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Also, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the gaming machine 1 can be made more entertaining and less likely to get bored. It has become.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, the right logo movable decorative body 3230 of each movable upper movable decorative body unit 3200 provided in the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result, the left Logo movable decorative body 3235, star unit 3240, star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245, decorative body main body 3414 of side movable decorative body unit 3400, lower movable decorative body unit 3600, rear lifting base 3630 and front lifting base 3632 (front right wing The decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642), the rear right wing decorative member 3664, the rear left wing decorative member 3666, etc. are operated as appropriate, and the decorative boards 2114, 2129, 2206, 2430, 2432, etc. provided in the game board 4 and the like are provided. 2434, 3024, 3025, 3035, 3036, 3043, 3233 The LEDs mounted on 3238, 3247, 3249, 3418, 3420, 3638, 3664, 3646, 3668, and 3670 are made to emit light appropriately, so that the player can be entertained by moving effects and light effects. ing.

[7. Control processing]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the gaming machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 646a is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 646a is provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch 646a outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined that there is, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 646a is not operated when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to by the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 646a is operated when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process, and the gaming machine 1 is set to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode at the time when the special symbol variation display is stopped, the special symbol variation Whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 in response to a variable random number used for a lottery process for a predetermined time (variation time) required for display control, and a variable symbol special display Reach random number (reach random number) used in the lottery process, and the design random number (first design random number 2 random numbers), a random number counter for holding random numbers such as random numbers (ordinary random numbers) used for lottery processing for winning a hit that becomes an operation trigger of the movable piece 2105, etc. .

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2101 is won for starting, the second starting port 2102 is won for starting. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination value to be compared with the acquired reach random number may be set as the reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the reach determination table. By providing a second reach determination table in which a reach determination value different from the one reach determination table is provided, the execution ratio of reach production is made different. Good.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 54 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100.

As shown in FIG. 54 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, as processing in step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2304, the first start port sensor 3080, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, and the general winning port sensor 3081 are input.
Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of a random number counter that generates a random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, symbol random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the special symbol and normal symbol variable display stop are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process concerning the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the process of step S14. Run. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second symbol) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process related to a win as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2105 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2105 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (time reduction control). ). In this embodiment, the time required for the normal symbol variation display control is shortened by a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the opening time of the movable piece 2105 is extended to realize such time-shortening control. I am doing so.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the main symbol process in step S16. Processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the control MPU 4100a to the peripheral board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral board 4010, for example, is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs information output processing for outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit, 2R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the processing of step S18. .

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 turns on detection signals such as the first start port sensor 3080, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, and the general winning port sensor 3081 as the process of step S19. When in a state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 1186 so that a prize ball corresponding to these signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a mounted on the payout control board 1186 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of suspensions as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control is finished. Become.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 55, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is first detected by the first start port sensor 3080. On condition that the signal is on (the ball enters the first start port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the first special RAM of the RAM. First start port passage processing such as storing in the symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2127 is in the ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is obtained from the random number counter. A second start port passage process such as acquiring and storing this in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state is set, and whether or not a small hit running flag is set indicating that the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state. If it is determined (step S35) and the big hit execution flag is set, a hit control process (step S39) for controlling the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state is executed. Note that when the hit control process related to 15R high probability short-time hit, 2R high probability short-time hit and 2R high probability non-short-time hit is finished, a probability variation flag is set, 15R high probability short-time hit, 15R low probability short-time hit, and 2R The time reduction flag is set when the hit control process related to high probability short-lived is ended, and when the hit control process related to 15R high-probability short-time hit and 2R high-probability short-time hit is ended, the counter value of a time reduction counter described later is set to “0”. ”Is set, and when the hit control process related to the 15R low probability time-shortening is terminated, the initial value“ 100 ”is set as the counter value of the time-shortening counter. As a result, the control for improving the winning probability of the jackpot is executed after the jackpot gaming state related to the 15R high probability short-time hit, the 2R high-probability short-time hit, and the 2R high-probability non-short-time hit is finished. After the jackpot gaming state related to the high probability short-lived, the time-shortening control is executed until the big hit is reached again, and after the jackpot gaming state related to the 15R low-probability short-lived time is finished, the time display is shortened until the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times. Control is executed.

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S36), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S37), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first start port sensor 3080 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2101, as shown in FIG. In step S41, the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 first obtains a counter value from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a by a first special reservation number counter for counting the number of reservations of the first special symbol. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the first number of reservations is not the maximum value, the following processes in steps S42 to S44 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. Will be performed. That is, first, as a process of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is counted up. At this time, a total special hold number counter that counts the sum of the first hold number and the second hold number is counted up. The main control MPU 4100a can grasp the total of the first hold number and the second hold number by referring to the counter value of the total special hold number counter. Next, as a process in step S43, the first special random number and the first symbol random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S44, each random number thus obtained is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a. To do.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the first reserved number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Next, if the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed is not set (step S45), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the first special random number acquired in step S43. However, if it is determined that the jackpot will be made, the type of jackpot is determined based on the first symbol random number, while if it is not the jackpot, it is determined whether to reach based on the reach random number A determination process is executed (step S46), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the time reduction flag is set, a hold number designation command corresponding to the hold number is set and the process is terminated (step S47). Accordingly, whether or not the big win is started before starting the variable display based on the start winning generated by winning the game ball to the first starting opening 2101, the type of the big hit, and whether or not the reach is reached Can be determined. In this example, the effect pre-determination process for the first special symbol is executed on the condition that the time reduction control is not executed.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the second start-port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in step S33 that the second start port sensor 2127 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2102, as shown in FIG. In step S51, the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the second reserved number is not the maximum value, the following processes in steps S52 to S54 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. Will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is counted up and the combined special reservation number counter is counted up. Next, as a process in step S53, the second special random number and the second symbol random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S54, each random number thus obtained is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. To do.

  However, if it is determined in step S51 that the second reserved number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, this processing is terminated when it is determined that the second number of reserved symbols is the maximum value without newly setting the variable display control of the second special symbol.

  Next, if the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed is set (step S55), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it will be a big hit based on the second special random number acquired in step S53. However, if it is determined that the jackpot will be made, the type of jackpot is determined based on the second symbol random number, while if it is not the jackpot, it is determined whether to reach based on the reach random number A determination process is executed (step S56), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the time reduction flag is not set, a hold number designation command corresponding to the hold number is set and the process is terminated (step S57). Accordingly, whether or not the big win is started before starting the variable display based on the start winning generated by the game ball winning at the second starting port 2102, the type of the big hit, and whether or not the reach is reached Can be determined. In this example, the effect pre-determination process for the second special symbol is executed on condition that the time reduction control is being executed.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination processing (steps S46 and S56). Note that the effect predetermination process executed in step S46 of the first start port passage process and the effect predetermination process executed in step S56 of the second start port pass process are common program modules, and the random number used for the determination is Since only the difference is made, only the effect predetermination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S46 of the first start port passing process will be described here. Note that the step of the first start port passing process is performed by differentiating the lottery probability as to whether or not to win the jackpot based on the first special random number and the lottery probability as to whether or not to win the jackpot based on the second special random number. The table referred to in the effect preliminary determination process executed in S46 may be different from the table referred to in the effect preliminary determination process executed in step S56 of the second start port passage process.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 59 is compared with the acquired random numbers, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, and the reach random number. It is specified whether or not a big hit is made, whether the big hit is a big hit, and if the big hit is not a big win, whether the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S61). ). Note that the prior determination table in FIG. 59 shows the ratio of each determination value.

  In addition, when the probability variation flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is executed is set, it is determined whether or not the big hit is made by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the first special random number. If the probability variation flag is not set, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made by comparing the low probability jackpot determination value with the first special random number. This high-probability jackpot determination value is set in the high-probability table of the hit determination table and is set to the same random number as the jackpot determination value compared with the special random number. The low-probability jackpot determination value is the hit determination table. The same random number value as the jackpot determination value set in the low probability table and compared with the special random number is used. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number with the high-probability prior determination table or the low-probability preliminary determination table in step S61, it is possible to accurately specify whether or not a big hit has occurred.

  In this example, the same random number as the jackpot determination value in the prior determination table and the jackpot determination value in the hit determination table is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot determination value of the prior determination table includes only a part of the jackpot determination value of the hit determination table, or a part or all of the jackpot determination value of the hit determination table is different from the jackpot determination value of the hit determination table. It may be configured to include a random number of numbers, and the degree of possibility of being a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

  Specifically, the jackpot determination value and the jackpot determination value different from the jackpot determination value can be determined as a high probability random number group, respectively, and the jackpot determination value that can be determined as the high probability random number group. The ratio with respect to the loss judgment value is a high probability random number determining means that is set higher than the ratio of the hit determination table in which the winning probability of the big hit is determined, and a special random number (the first random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring means With regard to the jackpot determination in which the special random number or the second special random number) is classified and discriminated as either the outlier determination value or the jackpot determination value, the special random number used for the determination is kept in an unexecuted state. By judging whether or not it is a value belonging to a high-probability random number group in which jackpot judgment value and outlier judgment value are mixed, for each judgment process put on hold A pseudo-probability advance determination unit that enables execution of an advance determination on the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to winning a winning, and the pseudo-probability advance determination unit makes an advance determination on the expectation related to a big win Also good.

  In this way, by including a high probability random number determining means in which the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value are mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the winning result of the jackpot judgment that is still on hold can be leaked While maintaining the conventional production structure that eliminates the risk, the expectation level (pseudo-winning probability) of the jackpot winning value according to the mixture ratio of the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value in the means with high probability random number determination The determination can be executed. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), when the preceding determination that the special random number used for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit determination value) has not been made Is the degree of expectation related to winning the jackpot when the judgment process based on the random number (the value belonging to the low probability random number group that is paired with the high probability random number group) that is not the special hit judgment value determined in advance is digested It is determined that the (pseudo winning probability) is lower than the expectation level (winning probability) of the jackpot (a winning probability that is reduced in a pseudo manner).

  According to the preceding determination method for such a high probability random number group, when the specific determination process is put on hold, the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). In addition, the expected degree (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing such as a new output of the hold display or a shift display corresponding to the hold display. Will come to be.

  Then, as a result of the comparison between the pre-determination table and the acquired random number, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 if it is not a big hit) A reach determination is executed as a game effect to be executed, and a pre-determination command indicating the first hold number (the value of the first special hold number counter)) is set (step S62). As a result, the start opening (one of the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102) where the start winning is generated, the number of holdings stored corresponding to the start opening, and the start winning based on the generated start winning Whether or not the display result of the variable symbol display of one special symbol is a big hit, whether the big win is the type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not, whether the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 The peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 can grasp the pre-determination information such as before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S37).

  In the first special symbol process, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selectively executes one of the following five process processes in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number, the first symbol random number, and the like stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 are read, and whether or not the read first special random number matches a predetermined big hit determination value and the small hit determination. As a result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on whether or not it matches the value, the first special symbol in which a lottery process (winning determination process), such as whether to win or not, is performed Normal processing (step S80)
2. If a lottery result is obtained based on the first special random number, the type of jackpot (per 15R high probability short / short, 2R high probability short / short, 2R low probability short / short) based on the first symbol random number and The process for determining the stop symbol of the first special symbol according to the type of jackpot, and when the lottery result indicating that the jackpot is not won based on the first special random number is obtained, the reach random number is a predetermined reach determination value. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process for determining whether or not the reach effect is executed based on whether or not the match and the stop symbol of the first special symbol at the time of losing is performed.
3. About the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 based on the variable random number and the reach random number, and the variation mode of the decorative symbol executed corresponding to the first special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 The first variation pattern setting process for transmitting the first variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the decorative design to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S82).
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol is the first special symbol that is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped and the result of the determination process for the type of jackpot First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be displayed on the display 641 (step S84).

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the processing of step S1 described above (see FIG. 54).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 61, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S101. Then, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the reach random number, and the first symbol random number) relating to the display mode of the first symbol being read is read from the RAM. Then, as a process of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is displayed. Random numbers (first special random number, reach random number, and first symbol random number) related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). Become.

  After that, as a process of step S105, a hit determination process which is a lottery process for a big win is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) (step S111), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 hits the high probability time shown in FIG. When a determination table is selected (step S112) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a low probability hit determination table shown in FIG. 63A is selected (step S113). The hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The hit determination table shown in FIG. 63 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a, and the hit determination table at the low probability used when the gaming state is low probability (normal state and low probability short state) And a high probability hit determination table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short time state, high probability short time state). In the hit determination table at the low probability, the five types of special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the big hit is won, and seven types of special random numbers (first Special random numbers and second special random numbers) are matched with the small hit determination value indicating that the small win is won, and the special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 1537 types of random values are out of sync. Has been.

Also, in the hit determination table at high probability, the same special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) as the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) set in the low probability hit determination table ) Including 50 types of special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) match the big hit judgment value, and special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) set in the hit judgment table at the time of low probability ) And 7 types of special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) that are the same special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) match the small hit determination value, and 1492 types of random numbers are Special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value.
Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-time-short state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the big hit is won is 10 in the low probability (normal state and short-time state). Doubled. On the other hand, even if the small hit determination value is controlled to a high probability state, the number of small hit determination values that are set does not change, and the small hit determination is always performed with a certain probability. .

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a big hit (step S115a). Then, the big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won is set and the processing is ended (step S115b). When it is determined that the big win is won (step S116a), the fluctuation is won for the big win. When the small hit flag indicating that it is set is set to end the process (step S116b) and it is determined that the hit is lost, the result of comparison between the reach determination table (not shown) and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S102) S117), when it is determined that the reach is out of step (step S118), the fluctuation is the reach. Sets a reach flag indicating that a and ends the process (step S119). Note that, in the reach determination table, similar to the pre-determination table, the reach determination value indicating that 9 types of reach random numbers are reached and the reach determination value indicating that 230 types of reach random numbers are not reached are matched. Reach random numbers are associated with each.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 64, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set, main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 63 (B) (step S122). ), The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (first special symbol stop symbol) at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined (step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 63 (B), the symbol determination table includes symbol random numbers (first per 2R high probability non-short time, 2R high probability short time, 15R low probability short time, 15R high probability short time). 1 design random number, 2nd design random number) are stored in an associated manner. In this example, in the symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 10 types of the first symbol random numbers coincide with 2R high probability non-short-time and 12 types of first symbol random numbers match with 2R high probability short-time. In addition, the first symbol random numbers are associated with each other so that 39 types of first symbol random numbers coincide with 15R low-probability short-time per hour, and 39 types of first symbol random numbers coincide with 15R high-probability short-term per-hour. In addition, in the symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, six types of second symbol random numbers coincide with 2R high-probability short time, and 55 types of second symbol random numbers coincide with 15R low-probability short-time. The second symbol random number is associated so that the second symbol random number of the type coincides with the 15R high probability time-shortening, and the second symbol random number is not associated with the 2R high-probability non-shortening time. The second special random number is set so that the ratio of 15R big hit (especially per 15R low probability short time) is higher than the first special random number, and the ratio of 2R big hit is set low. ing. Thereby, when the start winning to the second starting port 2102 that is likely to occur when the time-shortening control is being executed, the number of starting winnings to the first starting port 2101 is larger than that when the starting winning is generated. A jackpot (15R jackpot in this example) that can win a prize ball is generated. Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the jackpot type by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. Control to 15R jackpot gaming state, and control to the high probability short-time state until the big hit again after the 15R jackpot gaming state ends. 2. Control to 15R jackpot gaming state and control to the 15R jackpot gaming state. After the state ends, the low probability short-time state is controlled until the low probability short-time state is controlled until a predetermined number of times (100 times) of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed. 15R low-probability short-time control to 3 state) Control to 2R big-hit gaming state, and control to the high-probability short-time state until the big-hit short-time state again after the 2R big-hit gaming state ends. It is controlled to the gaming state, and after the 2R jackpot gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the high probability non-time-short state until it becomes a big jackpot again. It is determined to be one of the jackpot.

  In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 1400 after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is determined that the possibility of being in the high probability state is the highest or the probability mode in which it is possible to determine the high probability state, and the possibility of being in the high probability state is high. A plurality of presentation modes, such as a possible presentation mode, a presentation mode in which it is possible to determine that there is a high probability of being in a low probability state, a presentation mode in which it is most likely that it is in a low probability state, or that it is possible to determine that it is in a low probability state, etc. You may make it control in any one of production modes. Thereby, even if it is a case where it is not controlled to a high probability state, expectation to a high probability state can be held and the improvement of an operation rate can be aimed at.

  Also, in this example, as the short time state after the big hit gaming state, the normal symbol winning probability, the time required for the normal symbol variable display control, the opening time of the movable piece 2105, etc. are controlled to the short time state, which is controlled in the same manner. Depending on the type of jackpot, the control contents in the short-time state may be varied. For example, when 15R high probability short-time hit and 2R high probability short-time hit are controlled to the first short-time state where the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed after the end of the big hit gaming state is 0.3 seconds, 15R low In the case of short-term chance, the normal symbol change time executed after the end of the big-hit gaming state is controlled to a short-time state that is 1 second longer than the first short-time state. You may make it control to the 1st short time state and the 2nd short time state which is disadvantageous to a player rather than a 1st short time state.

  Moreover, the mode at the time of special symbol fluctuation stop corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, when it is determined per 15R high-probability short / short time, the first special symbol is determined to be a 15R high-probability short / short-time pattern as a mode when the fluctuation is stopped, and when it is determined per 15R low-probability short / short time. When the special symbol fluctuation stop mode is determined to be the 15R low probability short-term symbol, and when the 2R high probability short-term symbol is determined, the 2R high probability short-term symbol is determined to be the 2R high probability short-term symbol. If it is determined per 2R high probability non-short-time-short, the 2R high probability non-time-short symbol is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is suspended (step S123).

  Further, if the small hit flag is set (step S124), the main control MPU 4100a determines the small hit symbol as the mode when the first special symbol variation is stopped (step S125). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be an off symbol as a mode when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S127).

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S128, these lottery results (one of the types of jackpots, reach detachment, or detachment) are transmitted to the peripheral board 4010. Set the judgment result notification command according to Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S129, this process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 4140a is based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (a first variation pattern command for instructing a variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation pattern command for instructing a variation pattern of the second special symbol). The liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled to display.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 65, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 displays a big hit flag or a small hit flag. Is set (step S141), a plurality of types of variation pattern tables (a table selected in the case of 2R high probability short / short time, a table selected in the case of 2R high probability non-short time, 15R high probability short time per time Table selected in the case of 15R, table selected in the case of 15R low probability short-time win, table selected in the case of small hit) determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process A table corresponding to the type of big hit or small hit is selected (step S142), and if the reach flag is set (step S142). S143), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach is selected and the reach flag is reset (step S144). If neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal failure (a failure to execute the reach effect) ), The variation pattern table at the time of detachment is selected (step S145).

  Then, the variable random number is acquired from the random number counter that updates the variable random number, and the variable pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the acquired variable random number with the selected variable pattern table (step S146). The first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 is set by setting a first variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral board 4010 that the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined variation pattern is started. Is displayed (step S147). Further, when determining the variation pattern, main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S148). As a result, the effect control is performed in the first special symbol display 641 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 for the variation time thus determined.

  Although not shown, a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided corresponding to determination results based on special random numbers (first special random numbers, second special random numbers) and design random numbers (first design random numbers, second design random numbers). Yes. The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and then compares the selected table with the obtained variation random number, and is associated with the variation random number. By obtaining the fluctuation time information from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process about the variation pattern of a special symbol (a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol) comes to be performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Also, in this example, after the end of the big hit gaming state and after the end of the small hit gaming state, any one of a plurality of types of effect modes with different display modes (background color, background mode, decorative pattern mode, etc.) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 Control to the production mode. There are multiple types of performance modes depending on the gaming state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state, low probability short-time state, low probability non-short-time state (normal state)) and the type of jackpot. The production effect is improved by controlling the production mode corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state. Specifically, it is executed when the production mode is controlled to the high probability short-time state after the end of 15R high-probability short-time and the high probability short-time state after the end of 2R high-probability short-time, and is controlled to the high-probability state. This is executed when the control is performed in the high probability determination mode in which it is possible to discriminate between the low probability short-time state after the end of the 15R low-probability short time and the high probability short-time state after the end of the 15R high-probability short-time. It is executed in the indeterminate short time mode in which it is difficult to determine that the state is controlled, the high probability non-short state after the end of the 2R high probability non-short state, and the high probability state after the end of the small hit gaming state. It has a non-determined non-short-time mode in which it is difficult to distinguish, and a normal mode that is executed when controlling to a low-probability non-time-short state (normal state) and can determine that it is controlling to a low-probability state. Yes. In the peripheral control ROM 4140b of the peripheral control board 4140, commands (specifically, change pattern commands (first change pattern command, second change pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 4100 and instructing display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are displayed. )), A plurality of control programs are provided for each effect mode. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a command (variation pattern command) for instructing the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has received the control program of a plurality of types corresponding to the current effect mode. By controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the control program corresponding to the command, the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the rendering mode is controlled.

  In this example, the variable random number is acquired at the start of the change of the special symbol. However, the acquisition timing is not limited as long as it is before the start of the change. For example, you may make it acquire a variable random number at the time of start winning. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, if it is 15R high probability short-time hit, it is controlled to the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state is finished). After the end of the state, the previous gaming state is continuously executed. In other words, the small hit gaming state is different from the big hit gaming state in that it merely gives an opportunity for a winning ball and does not give an advantageous state.

  When the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, whether or not the counter value of the hour / temp counter is set to “0” is set as the processing of step S149 next. Judging. If the counter value is not “0”, after the time-short counter is counted down (step S150), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-count counter is “0” (step S151). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction control is ended is set (step S152).

  If it is determined in step S149 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in step S151 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, then at that time The process proceeds to step S153. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S153), this processing is terminated.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 66, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S171. 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. Then, if it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, that the selected variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 67, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S181. Display control for causing the first special symbol display 641 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and causing the liquid crystal display device 1400 to respond to the stop symbol of the first special symbol. The stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol is set as a command to the peripheral board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, when the time reduction end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time reduction end flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185). As a result, the time-shortening control is ended, and the control in the low probability non-time-shortening state (normal state) is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). A waiting time until the start (a time for displaying a message indicating that the big hit gaming state is started and a time when displaying whether it is difficult to determine whether the 2R big hit or the small hit is made) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the short time flag is set, the short time flag is reset, and if the probability change flag is set, the probability change flag is reset. (Step S189) At the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift the process to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (Step S194), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 4010, depending on the type of jackpot (per 15R high probability short / short, 15R low probability short / short, 2R high probability short / short, 2R high probability short / short). It is prepared individually. In step S187, the jackpot start command (15R high probability short-time hit command, 15R high probability short-time hit, 15R high probability short-time hit, 2R high probability short-time hit, 2R high-probability short-time hit, 2R high-probability short-time hit per command) Start command for probability short time, 2R high probability short time start command, 2R high probability non-short time start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the LED and the speakers 121, 391, and the like.

  Further, when the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started (step S191). A waiting time until the start of the hit gaming state (time for displaying whether it is difficult to determine whether the 2R big hit or the small hit is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S193), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When updated to (step S194), this process is terminated.

[Each process by peripheral control MPU 4140a]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 68, when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 is performed.
Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In this 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1400, LEDs 453a, 2114a, 2129a, 2206a, 2430a, 3025a, 3035a, 3043a, speakers 121, 391, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. The When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process in step S602, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is associated with the command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) instructed to execute the variation display transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control processing and control processing for driving the movable decorative body units (upper movable decorative body unit 3200, side movable decorative body unit 3400, and lower movable decorative body unit 3600) are executed.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speakers 130 and 391 is executed. In the lamp control process in step S604, a control process related to the LEDs provided in the gaming machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting an LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 4160 (the first lamp driving board 3801 and the second lamp driving board 3802) is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prior determination command reception process executed in the command analysis process (step S601). Peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a prior determination command reception process based on the reception of the prior determination command in the command analysis process.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the preliminary determination command determination process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the received preliminary determination command indicates the first pending number (step S601a). The first hold counter that counts the first hold number is incremented by 1 (step S601b), and the received advance determination command is received in the first hold area corresponding to the first hold counter value in the RAM storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Is stored in advance (step S601c). In this example, the maximum value of the first hold counter is set to 4, and a plurality of first hold areas D corresponding to the first hold counter value “4” corresponding to the first hold counter value “1” are set. The first reserved area is provided. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the first fluctuation pattern command indicating that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started in the command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a decrements the first hold counter by 1 and sets the first hold areas A to 1 The stored contents of the reserved area D are shifted (the stored contents of the first reserved area A are erased, and the stored contents of the first reserved areas B, C, D are moved to the first reserved areas A, B, C, respectively). . As a result, only the preliminary determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol being held is stored in the first reservation area A to the first reservation area D.

  If the received prior determination command indicates the second hold number, the second hold counter for counting the second hold number is incremented by 1 (step S601d), and the first of the RAM storage areas of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is stored. The prior determination information notified by the received prior determination command is stored in the second reservation area corresponding to the second reservation counter value (step S601e). In this example, the maximum value of the second hold counter is 4, and the plurality of second hold areas D corresponding to the second hold counter value A to the second hold counter value “4” corresponding to the second hold counter value “1”. The second reserved area is provided. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the second variation pattern command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a decrements the second reservation counter by 1 and sets the second reservation area A to the second reservation area A-2. The stored contents of the reserved area D are shifted (the stored contents of the second reserved area A are erased, and the stored contents of the second reserved areas B, C, D are moved to the second reserved areas A, B, C, respectively). . Thereby, in the 2nd reservation area A-the 2nd reservation area D, only the advance determination information regarding the fluctuation | variation display of the 2nd special symbol currently hold | maintained comes to be memorize | stored.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140. It will be.

1. Processing for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1400, the LED and the speakers 121, 391, etc. based on commands (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol analyzed by the command analysis processing After performing the change effect start process for changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the process during change effect (step S711).
2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the liquid crystal display device 1400, LED and speakers 121, 391, etc. is measured, and processing for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1400, LED and speakers 121, 391, etc. according to the elapsed time is performed. In the process of changing effects, the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the change end process in response to the elapse of the change time corresponding to the change pattern (step S712).
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result is performed based on the reception of a stop display command for instructing to stop the display of special symbols, and if it is off, the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the change effect start process. If it is a big hit, it is changed to a value corresponding to the big hit effect process, and if it is a small hit, a variable effect end process is changed to a value corresponding to the small hit effect process (step S713).
4). Based on the reception of the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot gaming state, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs processing for executing display control during the jackpot gaming state, and when the jackpot gaming state is ended, the effect process flag Jackpot effect processing (step S714) to change the value to the value according to the variation effect start processing
5. When processing for executing display control in the small hit gaming state is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing the start of the small hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state is ended. The small hit effect process for changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process (step S715)

  By the above processing, the liquid crystal is synchronized with the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display (first special symbol display 641, second special symbol display 642). The display device 1400 executes the decorative symbol variation display.

[Moving decorative body production]
Next, a game effect realized by a plurality of decorative bodies (for example, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200, the side movable decorative body unit 3400, and the lower movable decorative body unit 3600) arranged on the rear side of the game board 4 will be described.

  As described above, the gaming board 4 of the present example is configured by the transparent gaming panel 600 and the back of the gaming panel 4 can be visually recognized, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies (upper parts in this example) are provided on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 600. The movable decoration body unit 3200, the side movable decoration body unit 3400, and the lower movable decoration body unit 3600) are arranged, and the game area 605 is three-dimensionally decorated from the rear side of the game board 4 by its three-dimensional shape at each standby position. doing.

  In the gaming machine 1 of this example, in relation to the effect display executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the movable decoration body that is normally held at the standby position and decorates the game area 605 from the rear side of the game board 4 is driven. By doing so, a movable decoration effect that gives the player an unexpectedness is executed. Specifically, a notice effect that is displayed in relation to the display of the reach effect image and the reach development effect image, or in the period from when the decorative symbol variation display is started until when any decorative symbol is stopped. In relation to the display of the image, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 is moved to be displayed forward of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIGS. 48 and 49), or the movable decorative body 3400 is moved again to move the liquid crystal display device. A movable decoration effect is executed such that the image is displayed forward of 1400 (see FIG. 50), or the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 is moved to be displayed forward of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIGS. 51 and 52). In addition, a plurality of types of reach effect images, reach development effect images, and notice effect images are prepared, and a movable decoration effect is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns for executing the plurality of types of reach effect images, reach development effect images, and notice effect images. It is executed when the change pattern is determined.

  In the movable decorative body effect, a movable decorative body (upper movable decorative body unit 3200, side movable decorative body unit) which is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 600 and decorates the game area 605 in three dimensions from the rear side of the game board 4 at normal times. 3400 and the lower movable decorative body unit 3600) are moved to be displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, so that it is possible to give surprise to a player who has recognized that these are merely decorations, Game entertainment is improved. Further, a movable decorative body (upper movable) having a plurality of functions of a function of three-dimensionally decorating the game area 605 from the rear side of the game board 4 in a normal state and a function of appearing in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 when movable Since the decorative body unit 3200, the side movable decorative body unit 3400, and the lower movable decorative body unit 3600) are arranged, the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. That is, by configuring the movable decorative body, the game board 4 and the like so as to have a decorative function not only when it is movable but also when it is not movable (agreement with the normal time), one decorative body arranged for each function is obtained. The number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Further, by arranging the decorative bodies arranged for each function together, it is possible to realize an increase in size of the liquid crystal display device 1400 while arranging the movable decorative bodies.

  Note that in the gaming machine 1 as an example of the gaming machine, various winning devices are provided below the liquid crystal display device 1400, and it is necessary to secure a certain area for rolling the game ball (referred to as a rolling area). On the other hand, since no winning device is arranged above and to the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the rolling region may be narrower than the lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, even when the liquid crystal display device 1400 is enlarged, a rolling region below the liquid crystal display device 1400 is secured to some extent. In this example, the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1400 is exposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be enlarged and coexist with the movable decorative body. As a matter of course, a large movable ornament can be used. Further, in this example, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are disposed on the rear side of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 as the lower movable decoration body unit 3600, and the lower movable decoration body unit 3600 is raised. Then, the rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 are rotated so that the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 is completely exposed (see FIG. 42 (A) to FIG. 42 (B)). 42 (C), the movable decorative body can be further increased in size. That is, in the case of simply switching between the movable position where the movable decorative body is completely exposed by raising and lowering the movable decorative body and the standby position where the movable decorative body waits, there is a space limitation at the standby position of the movable decorative body. A movable ornament exceeding the space at the position can not be arranged, but if the movable ornament and the standby position are switched through a plurality of stages as in this example, the movable ornament exceeding the space at the standby position of the movable ornament is allowed. Since the body can be arranged, the movable decorative body can be enlarged.

  Further, in this example, the movable decoration body is shown to change between the time when the movable decoration body is exposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the normal time when waiting on the rear side of the game board 4. As an aspect, the game board 4 may have a function of moving in small increments on the rear side. Thus, in addition to being able to give unexpectedness when the movable decorative body is moved on the rear side of the game board 4, it can be assumed that the movable decorative body is simply moved in small increments on the rear side of the game board. In addition, when the movable decorative body is exposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a surprise can be given.

  Further, in this example, the back of the gaming board 4 is configured by a transparent gaming panel 600 so that the back of the gaming board 4 can be visually recognized, and a movable decorative body is disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 600 so that the gaming board 4 is not movable (normally). Although the game area 605 is configured to be decorated from the rear side of the game board 4, any movable decorative body that is arranged on the rear side of the game board 4 when not movable (normal time) can be visually recognized. It is not limited to this. For example, the game board 4 is composed of an opaque game panel formed such that a part of the game board 4 is hollowed out so that the back of the game board 4 can be visually recognized, and a movable decorative body is disposed on the rear side of the game board 4 corresponding to the part. Thus, the game area 605 may be decorated from the rear side of the game board 4 even when it is not movable (normal time).

  Each of the movable decorative bodies in this example is provided with a plurality of LEDs (LEDs 3233a, 3238a, 3247a, 3249a provided in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 shown in FIG. 36, and the side movable decorative body unit 3400 shown in FIG. LED 3418a, 3420a provided, LED 3638a, 3644a, 3646a, 3668a, 3670a) provided in the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 shown in FIG. The game area 605 is light-decorated from the rear side of the game board 4 by controlling the light emission of the LED (see FIGS. 10 and 46). Further, when the movable decoration effect is executed and the movable decoration body is displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the LED provided on the movable decoration body is controlled to emit light to emit light in a predetermined manner.

  As described above, in the movable decorative body effect, an LED (provided in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 shown in FIG. 36) that is arranged on the rear side of the gaming panel 600 and light-decorates the game area 605 from the rear side of the gaming board 4 in the normal state. LED 3233a, 3238a, 3247a, 3249a, LED 3418a, 3420a provided in the side movable decorative body unit 3400 shown in FIG. 38, LED 3638a, 3644a, 3646a, 3668a, 3670a) provided in the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 shown in FIG. Since the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed in front of the liquid crystal and emits light in a predetermined manner, the amount of light in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be increased to attract the player's attention. Also, a plurality of functions such as a function of light-decorating the game area 605 from the rear side of the game board 4 in a normal state and a function of emitting light in a predetermined manner by being displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 when movable are provided. LEDs (LEDs 3233a, 3238a, 3247a, 3249a provided in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 shown in FIG. 36, LEDs 3418a, 3420a provided in the side movable decorative body unit 3400 shown in FIG. 38, and the lower movable decorative body unit shown in FIG. Since the LEDs 3638a, 3644a, 3646a, 3668a, and 3670a) provided in the 3600 are arranged, the number of installed LEDs can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In other words, by arranging the LEDs so as to have a decoration function not only when it is movable but also when it is not movable (consent with the normal time) or configuring the game board 4, the LEDs arranged for each function can be changed. They can be arranged together, and the number of installations and the manufacturing cost of gaming machines can be reduced.

  In this example, the gaming board 4 is formed of a transparent gaming panel 600, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged on the rear side of the gaming panel 600, so that the gaming panel 4 is placed on the rear side of the gaming panel 600 even when it is not movable (normal time). The light emitted from the arranged LED is transmitted so that it can be seen from the front of the gaming machine so that the gaming area 605 is light-decorated from the rear side of the gaming board 4. However, even when it is not movable (normal time) The present invention is not limited to this as long as the gaming area 605 is light-decorated from the rear side of the game board 4 by a plurality of LEDs arranged on the rear side of the board 4. For example, the game board 4 is configured by an opaque game panel in which a predetermined number of through holes are formed, and light emitted from LEDs arranged on the rear side thereof is allowed to pass through the through holes so that the light can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Accordingly, the game area 605 may be light-decorated from the rear side of the game board 4 even when it is not movable (normal time).

  Also, as is apparent from FIG. 12, the left and right unit bases 3602 (see FIG. 26) of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 are arranged overlapping the back of the back front unit 3000a and the center accessory 2400, and the game board 4 The player is not visible from the player's side. Further, the front right wing decoration board 3644 and the front left wing decoration board 3646 of the lower movable decoration body unit 3600 are opaque, and the front right wing decoration board 3644 and the front left wing decoration are viewed from the player side as shown in FIG. The rear side of the substrate 3646 (the position where the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 are arranged in the front elevating base 3632) is not visible.

  Further, a device for raising and lowering the wing decoration members 3640, 3642, 3664, and 3666 of the lower movable ornament body unit 3600 (specifically, a lower raising / lowering drive motor 3606, a first transmission gear 3610, a second transmission gear 3612, a pinion) In order to arrange the gear 3616, the lifting rack 3618, the unit base 3602, the lifting rail 3620, and the lower lifting detection sensor 3622) on both sides of the wing decoration members 3640 and 3642, the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 are arranged. Can be created on the back of the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 without interfering with the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 as shown in FIG. A start port passage for discharging the winning game balls is formed and the start port An attacker drive mechanism base 2126 that supports a second start port sensor 2127 that detects a game ball circulating in the road, and a start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102; A start port drive transmission member 2122 for transmitting the drive of the start port solenoid 2121 to the movable piece 2105, a start port drive transmission member 2122, a start port drive mechanism base 2123 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 that supports the start port solenoid 2121, etc. It is possible to arrange an attacker driving unit 2120 including

[Music game reach production]
In the present embodiment, as a part of reach production using the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like, it is possible to derive a big hit when a predetermined task is achieved by the player operating the touch panel 480 in accordance with music. The music game reach production is executed. The music game reach production will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a music game reach effect control process executed by the peripheral control board 4140 that controls the liquid crystal display device 1400. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the music game reach effect in-process executed by the peripheral MPU provided on the peripheral control board 4140 as one process in the music game reach effect control process. FIG. 74 is a table showing the effective range (success range and failure range) of the touch panel 480 in the music game reach production. FIG. 75 is a time chart showing the order of appearance of the marker types in the music game reach production. FIG. 76 is an acquisition point determination table used to determine acquisition points when the touch panel 480 is operated in the success range. 77 and 78 are specific effect images in the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the music game reach effect is executed.

  First, music game reach production means that a player operates the touch panel 480 in accordance with a marker that flows on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 together with music, and when the touch panel 480 is operated in a timely manner, a predetermined number of points is obtained by lottery. This is a score effect indicating whether or not a predetermined task (in this embodiment, obtaining a certain number of points) is achieved by the end of the music, and the number of points acquired. When the number of points reaches a predetermined number of points (30 points in this embodiment), a bonus is given to the player.

  However, if the winning determination result by the lottery is a big hit, the predetermined task can be achieved by the player's efforts to operate the touch panel 480 in a timely manner. However, even if it makes an effort, it controls so that a predetermined subject is not achieved.

  In the present embodiment, by achieving a predetermined task by the end of the music game reach production, it is derived that the winning determination result is a big hit as a privilege given to the player. For example, when the winning determination result is a promising big hit, by achieving a predetermined task by the end of the music game reach production, As a privilege, it may be derived that “the winning determination result is a probable big hit”.

  In the big hit game, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and closed twice with the high-capacity in the big hit gaming state, so although it is a big hit, the game ball does not win and there is no play for the player. . However, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state becomes a probable change state and a short-time state, and the pair of blade-like movable pieces 2105 frequently opens and closes, and the winning probability to the second starting port 2102 is physically greatly increased. To up. For this reason, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Therefore, if the winning determination result is a promising big hit, by deriving a predetermined task by the end of the music game reach production, it is derived as a useful information (as a privilege) for the player, that it is a promising big hit To do. As a player, you can't expect to play, but as a compensatory one, you can achieve a certain task by directing a music game reach to fulfill your willingness to play with a notification that you are a promising big hit. Actively participate in.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a (hereinafter simply referred to as the peripheral control MPU) of the peripheral control board 4140 analyzes the control command based on the received winning determination result in the command analysis process of step S601 in the 16 ms steady process of FIG. Then, based on the analyzed control command, it is determined whether or not to perform a specific effect (music game reach effect). For example, what kind of effect is performed is determined based on the value of the random number for effect corresponding to the control command and the effect table. When it is determined to perform the specific effect, control is performed so that the specific effect (music game reach effect) is executed in the 16 ms steady process of steps S602 to S606 in FIG. For example, an execution flag for producing a music game reach is set.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in the music game reach effect control process executed in the effect control process in step S602 (mainly the change effect start process in step S711 and the change effect process in step S712), first, a part of the reach effect is performed. As described above, the start control of the music game reach effect is performed when it is determined to execute the music game reach effect.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU starts the music game reach effect control process, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the execution flag for the music game reach effect is set (step S801). If it is determined in step S801 that the execution flag for the music game reach effect is set (YES), is the value of the effect process flag described above with reference to FIG. 71 a value corresponding to the change effect start process? (Step S802), in this case, it is determined that the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the change effect start process (YES), and the music game reach effect setting process (step S803) is executed. The value of the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the process during the fluctuating effect (step S804), and the process returns from the music game reach effect control process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the execution flag for the music game reach effect is not set (NO), the music game reach effect is not executed, and the process returns from the music game reach effect control process. . Therefore, the music game reach production is not performed.

  In the music game reach production setting process in step S803, the music to be used as the music game reach production is determined from a plurality of types of music (in this embodiment, four music "Music A" to "Music D"), Data relating to the marker type set for the determined music and the effective range (success range and failure range) of the touch panel 480 is read from the peripheral control ROM 4140b. At this time, when determining the music to be used as a music game reach production, when the lottery result is a big hit, a song with a high expectation degree is determined with a high probability, and when the lottery result is out of the big hit expectation By determining a low probability song with a high probability, each song has a jackpot expectation, and when a song with a high jackpot expectation is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state increases It is like that.

  Also, the display of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started, the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the reach (the same symbol), and then the timing during the development to the normal reach effect (music game reach effect) At the start timing, control is performed so as to start the music game reach effect, and display control is performed so that the marker associated with the effective range of the touch panel 480 along with the music flows on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  In the music game reach production control process of the next processing cycle, the peripheral control MPU determines that step S801 is YES based on the fact that the execution flag is set and the production process flag is a value during the fluctuation production, and step S802. Is determined as NO, and the process proceeds to step S805 to determine whether or not the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the process during the changing effect (step S805). In this case, the value of the effect process flag is being changed It is determined that the value is in accordance with the process (YES), the music game reach production process (step S806) is executed, and then the non-operation period timing process (step S811) is executed to determine whether or not the variation time has elapsed. (Step S807), if the variation time has not elapsed, it is determined NO in step S807, and the music game reach effect control process is performed. Only to return to. The music game reach production process and the non-operation period timing process will be described later.

  When the fluctuation time has elapsed, step S807 is determined to be YES, the value of the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the change end process (step S808), and the process returns from the music game reach effect control process.

  In the music game reach effect control process of the next processing cycle, the peripheral control MPU determines that step S801 is YES based on the fact that the execution flag is set and the effect process flag is the value of the change end process, and step S802. Is determined as NO, step S805 is determined as NO, the process proceeds to step S809, the value of the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the change effect start process (step S809), and the execution flag for the music game reach effect is set. Clear (step S810), return from the music game reach production control process. Note that the music game reach production control process ends when the execution flag for the music game reach production is cleared.

  Next, the relationship between the effective range (success range and failure range) of the touch panel 480 and the marker will be described with reference to FIG. First, the marker that flows on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (moved and displayed from the right side to the left side at the bottom of the display panel) depends on the manner of operation on the touch panel 480, so that “touch” and “rub! "Sequential strike!", "Slide slide" are set. Each marker is accompanied by a character or an arrow indicating that an operation mode on the touch panel 480 is instructed.

  For each piece of music, as the production time elapses, markers dedicated to “touch”, “rub!”, “Continuous hit!”, And “slide slide” appear sequentially in a predetermined order on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. (See, for example, FIG. 75 (B)).

  As shown in FIG. 75 (A), except for the “continuous hit!” Marker, “effective range of touch panel 480” is set for a certain period before and after the marker, and “effective range of touch panel 480” is set. ", The range close to the marker is divided into" success range "and the range far from the marker is divided into" failure range ". However, only the marker is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the “effective range of the touch panel 480”, “success range”, and “failure range” are not displayed so that the player cannot recognize them. It has become.

In addition, when the touch panel 480 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the marker in the success range, the presentation expression corresponding to the acquired points is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the points can be acquired. When the touch panel 480 is operated in the failure range, or when the operation on the touch panel 480 is a contact operation mode different from the operation mode indicated by the marker even if the operation on the touch panel 480 is within the success range (for example, , The touch operation by touching the “rubbing!” Marker is applicable), and the presentation of failure (bad timing, erroneous operation) is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and points are earned. Can not do it.

  On the other hand, the “applicable range of touch panel 480” is always set for the appearance period of the “continuous hit!” Marker. When the touch panel 480 is operated within the effective range, points are obtained for each operation. It is possible.

  In addition, an example of the effective range (success range and failure range) of the touch panel 480 set for “Song A” among a plurality of types of songs (four songs in the present embodiment) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. To do. In FIG. 74, for each marker, the time value from the start of the music game reach production is described in the number of frames (1F = 33 ms).

  As shown in FIG. 74A, for the “touch” marker, 12 types of effective ranges A1 to A12 are set for the touch panel 480 so that the marker appears 12 times in the music. The effective range of these touch panels 480 is set such that the success range is 7F for A1 to A4, A7 to A10, and the success range is 5F for A5, A6, A11, and A12.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 74B, for the marker “continuous hit!”, One type of effective range B1 is set on the touch panel 480 so that this marker appears only once in the music. . The effective range of the touch panel 480 is set to a range of 144F with respect to B1, and the effective range is much longer than other markers. For this reason, in the effective range of the touch panel 480, it is possible for the player to operate the touch panel 480 several tens of times, and a period during which a large amount of points can be obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 74C, for the marker “rub!”, Two types of effective ranges of the touch panel 480, C1 and C2, are set so that the marker appears twice in the music. Yes. In the effective range of these touch panels 480, the success range is set to 7F with respect to C1 and C2, and the success range is substantially the same as the “touch” marker. However, as will be described later, when the touch panel 480 is operated in the success range, there is a higher probability of acquiring points than the “touch” marker, and it is a period in which a large amount of points can be acquired. .

  As shown in FIG. 74D, for the “slide slide” marker, one type of effective range D1 is set on the touch panel 480 so that this marker appears only once at the end of the music. Yes. In the effective range of the touch panel 480, the success range is set to 7F with respect to D1, and the success range is substantially equal to the markers “touch” and “rub!”. However, as will be described later, when the touch panel 480 is operated in the success range, there is a higher probability of acquiring points than the “touch” and “rub!” Markers, and a large amount of points can be acquired. It is a period.

[Processing during music game reach production]
Next, the music game reach production process will be described. During the execution of the music game reach effect, it is determined whether or not the player has operated the touch panel 480 within the effective range of the touch panel 480, and when the touch panel 480 is operated within the success range, the effect corresponding to the acquired points The display control of the acquired points is performed together with the expression (success effect expression when there is point acquisition, effect expression equivalent to failure when there is no point acquisition).

  When the peripheral control MPU starts the processing during the music game reach production, as shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not it is within the effective range for the operation of the touch panel 480 set to the music game reach production (step S901). If it is in the effective range for the operation of the touch panel 480 (YES), it is determined whether or not the touch detected flag is set (step S902). If it is determined in step S902 that the touch detected flag is not set (NO), an input signal from the touch panel 480 that can be detected by the peripheral control board 4140 when the player operates the touch panel 480 is detected. It is determined whether or not (step S903). If an input signal from the touch panel 480 is detected in step S903 (YES), the touch detected flag is set except for the effective range of the touch panel 480 with “continuous hit!” (Step S904), and step S907. Proceed to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S902 that the touch detected flag is set (NO), or if an input signal from the touch panel 480 is not detected in step S903 (NO), steps S907 to S914 are performed. Without executing the process, the process exits the music game reach production process and returns to the music game reach production control process routine.

  The touch detected flag is a flag indicating that one operation has already been detected in the effective range of the touch panel 480. For this reason, if the touch panel 480 is operated once in the effective range except for the effective range of the touch panel 480 with “continuous hit!”, The detection of the operation is accepted after that regardless of whether the operation is within the success range. There is nothing.

  On the other hand, even if it is not in the effective range for the operation of the touch panel 480 set to the music game reach effect in step S901 (NO), it is determined whether or not the touch detected flag is set (step S905). If it is determined in step S905 that the touch detected flag is set (YES), the touch detected flag is cleared (step S906), the music game reach effect in-process is exited, and the music game reach effect control is performed. Return to the processing routine. If it is determined in step S905 that the touch detected flag has not been set (NO), the process exits the music game reach production process and returns to the music game reach production control process routine.

  In this way, after setting the touch detected flag in the effective range of the touch panel 480, the touch detected flag is reset in the next effective range by resetting the touch detected flag when the effective range ends. Is possible.

  Further, after the touch detected flag is set in step S904, it is determined whether or not the timing at which the input signal is detected from the touch panel 480 is a successful range in the effective range for the operation of the touch panel 480 (step S907). If the timing at which the input signal is detected from the touch panel 480 in step S907 is within the success range (YES), the process proceeds to step S908, and whether the operation mode on the touch panel 480 matches the operation mode indicated by the marker. Is determined (step S908).

  In touch panel 480, the contact state on the contact surface of the player's touch panel 480 is detected, the coordinate value of the contact surface of touch panel 480 indicating the center of the contact portion is acquired based on the contact state, and is represented by the coordinate value. The position is specified as a detection point. Further, an operation such as tapping, rubbing, and repelling with respect to the touch panel is discriminated by an internal mechanism (not shown) and acquired as operation information in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG.

For example, when the operation mode on the touch panel 480 performed by the player with respect to the marker “rubbing!” Is determined as two-dimensional detection data “rubbing”, the operation mode on the touch panel 480 and the marker indicate It is determined that the operated mode matches.
In this case, the process proceeds to step S909, and an acquired point determination table (see FIG. 76) corresponding to the marker type, winning, and current point is selected (step S909). Then, the determination value set in the selected acquisition point determination table is compared with the read random number (acquisition point determination random number) to determine the points to be acquired by operating the touch panel 480 (step S910).

  The acquisition point determination table shown in FIG. 76 is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b. When the player operates the touch panel 480 in the success range within the effective range of the touch panel 480 in the operation mode indicated by the marker, It is a table used in order to determine an acquisition point according to the type, winning, and current point. In each acquisition point determination table, the determination value is distributed so that the acquisition point is either +0 (no acquisition), +1, +2, or +30.

  Specifically, as an acquisition point determination table used when the “touch” marker appears, a table corresponding to the winning and current points is provided as shown in FIG. 76A, and when the “continuous hit!” Marker appears. As the acquisition point determination table to be used, a table corresponding to the winning and current points is provided as shown in FIG. 76 (B), and as the acquisition point determination table used when the “Rubbing!” Marker appears, FIG. As shown in FIG. 76 (D), a table corresponding to the winning and current points is provided, and a table corresponding to the winning and current points as shown in FIG. A table is provided.

  In the acquisition point determination table when the lottery result is out, the determination value is not assigned to +30 acquisition points. In addition, in the acquisition point determination table when the lottery result is out, when the current point is 28 points, the determination value is not assigned to the +2 acquisition points, and the current point is 29 points , +1, and +2 are not assigned judgment values. For this reason, when the lottery result is out of place, even if newly acquired points are added to the current point, a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieve the task can be reached. For example, even when the player repeatedly hits the touch panel 480 more than expected when the “sequential hit!” Marker appears, it is possible to prevent the predetermined task from being achieved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the acquisition point determination table at the time of appearance of the “continuous hit!” Marker has an acquisition point lower than the acquisition point determination table at the time of appearance of the “touch” marker (for example, from +1). Many judgment values are assigned to (acquired points of +0).
However, when the “continuous hit!” Marker appears, it is possible to operate the touch panel 480 several tens of times within the effective range, and even if the probability of obtaining a higher point than the “touch” marker is low, the task can be achieved. Can approach.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 76C, the acquisition point determination table when the “Rubbing!” Marker appears is higher than the acquisition point determination table when the “touch” marker appears (eg, from +1). Many judgment values are assigned to (acquired points of +2). Therefore, when the “rubbing!” Marker appears, when the touch panel 480 is operated within the success range, there is a high probability of acquiring a higher point than the “touch” marker, and the task can be approached.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 76D, in the acquisition point determination table when the “slide slide” marker appears, when the lottery result is a big hit, the acquisition when the “touch” or “rub!” Marker appears. Many determination values are assigned to +30 acquired points in the point determination table. For this reason, when the touch panel 480 is operated within the success range when the “slide slide” marker appears, if the lottery result is a big hit, a fixed number of points (30 points in this embodiment) is achieved. ) Is high and a predetermined task is easily achieved at the end of the music.

  In addition, in the acquisition point determination table at the time of the appearance of a marker excluding “slide slide”, if the lottery result is out, the lottery result is displayed except that the determination value is not assigned to the +30 acquisition points. The judgment values are assigned almost the same as in the case of the big hit. For this reason, when the lottery result is out of place, a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) for achieving the task will not be reached, but as in the case where the lottery result is a big hit, Until the “slide slide” marker appears, it is close to achieving the task.

  Also, in the acquisition point determination table when the lottery result is a big hit, when the current point is 28 points, the judgment value is not distributed to the +2 acquisition points, and the current point is 29 points , +1, and +2 are not assigned judgment values. However, in the acquisition point determination table at the time of appearance of a marker excluding “slide slide”, when the lottery result is a big hit, the acquisition point determination table is +30 compared to the acquisition point determination table at the time of appearance of the “slide slide” marker. There are few judgment values to be distributed.

  For this reason, when the lottery result is a big hit, even if newly acquired points are added to the current point, it is difficult to reach a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieves the task. Until the “slide slide” marker appears at the end of the song, it is difficult to achieve a predetermined task.

  Then, after determining the acquired points by operating the touch panel 480 in step S910, on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, an effect expression according to the acquired points is performed and updated to the accumulated points obtained by adding the acquired points (step). S911).

  On the other hand, if the timing at which the input signal is detected from the touch panel 480 in step S907 is within the failure range (NO), or the operation mode on the touch panel 480 matches the operation mode indicated by the marker in step S908. If it is determined that it is not present (NO), an effect expression of failure (bad timing, erroneous operation) is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S912).

  In this embodiment, it is set so that the effect displayed by success and failure is changed depending on the acquired points, and a star effect appears when the acquired expression is +1 as a presentation expression of success (point acquisition). When the acquired point is +2, the heart effect and the word “GOOD” appear, and when the acquired point is +30, the HK mark effect appears, while the input signal is detected from the touch panel 480. In the case where is a success range but +0 points (no points are acquired) and in the failure range, a smoke effect appears.

  In step S911, after updating to the accumulated point obtained by adding the acquired points, it is determined whether or not the accumulated point has reached a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieves the task. (Step S913) When the predetermined number of points has been reached (YES), display at the time of big hit is executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (Step S914).

  In the present embodiment, when the task is not achieved at the end of the music game reach production, the display at the time of disconnection is executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. However, when the lottery result is a big hit and the problem is not achieved due to the absence of the operation of the touch panel 480, the display at the time of disengagement is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and then the display at the time of the big hit is made. It is supposed to be promoted.

  In addition, the appearance order of the marker types set for “Song A” among a plurality of types of songs (in this embodiment, “Song A” to “Song D” is four songs) (for the effective range of the touch panel 480). 74) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75B, before the “rub!” Marker C2 appears, the “touch” markers A1 to A12 have a predetermined interval except for the “rub!” Marker C1. It is set to appear in That is, in the first half of the music game reach production, many “touch” markers appear, and even if the touch panel 480 is operated in each successful range, it is difficult to obtain high points by lottery. For this reason, in the first half of the music game reach production, the probability of reaching a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieves the task is extremely low, and the player who is good at operating the touch panel 480 is However, the predetermined problem is set so as not to be achieved early, and the expectation for the achievement of the problem (derivation of jackpot) is maintained until the latter half of the production.

  On the other hand, after the “rubbed!” Marker C2 appears, the “continuous hit!” Marker B1 and the “slide slide” marker D1 appear so as to appear at a predetermined interval. That is, in the latter half of the music game reach production, the player can operate the touch panel 480 several tens of times by the appearance of the “Battery!” Marker B1, which increases the chance of a lottery to earn points. Yes.

  Further, when the touch panel 480 is operated within the success range due to the appearance of the “slide slide” marker D1, if the lottery result is a big hit, it is possible to obtain a high point by lottery. For this reason, in the second half of the music game reach production, it becomes easy to acquire points, and if the lottery result is a big hit, the fixed number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieves the task is reached. Probability is high. Therefore, even if the player is poor at the operation of the touch panel 480 and can hardly obtain points in the first half of the music game reach production, the player can recover in the second half of the production and achieve a predetermined problem. When the lottery result is a big hit, the player's efforts to operate the touch panel 480 are rewarded to achieve a predetermined task as much as possible.

A specific example of music game reach production will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), at the start of the music game reach effect, an effect of determining the music used as the music game reach effect from the four songs is performed. At this time, four selected songs are displayed in order counterclockwise on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the player operates the touch panel 480 to produce an effect as if a song was selected. Is selected by an internal lottery, and the determined music is finally displayed.
This production example shows a case where “Song A” displayed on the upper left screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is determined among the four songs.

  In the lower right of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a reach symbol (in this example, a reach symbol of “1”) is displayed until the display of the game game reach effect, that is, the big hit or missed display is derived. In order to be discriminable to the player, the display is smaller than the normal variation from the start of the decorative symbol variation display to whether or not the reach symbol is formed.

  Next, “READY GO” is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 together with the start of the music and video of “Song A”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. MK1 is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side. The “touch” dedicated marker MK1 is accompanied by a character indicating that “touch” is instructed as an operation mode to the touch panel 480 on the rose pattern.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 77C, a certain period before and after the “touch” dedicated marker MK1 coincides with the marker frame MKW is set to “effective range of touch panel 480”, Of the “range”, the range close to the match with the marker frame MKW is set as the “success range”, and the range far from the match with the marker frame MKW is set as the “failure range”.

  Then, when the player operates the touch panel 480 in the success range, an effect expression according to the earned points is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the points can be earned while being instructed by the markers. When an operation mode different from the operation mode is operated, or when the player operates the touch panel 480 in the failure range, an effect expression of failure (bad timing, erroneous operation) is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. , Can not earn points.

  In addition, when the points are acquired, the total points updated by adding the acquired points in the meter 1401 formed with a scale of 30 divisions so that up to +30 acquired points can be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Is displayed from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 77D shows a mode in which a marker MK2 dedicated to “rub!” Has appeared on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Marker MK2 dedicated to “Rubbing!” Is accompanied by a letter indicating that “Rubbing!” Is instructed as an operation mode to touch panel 480 and an arrow pattern so as to repel toward the upper right. . In addition, the characters “Rubbing!” Are displayed larger than the characters “Touch”. In this way, it is possible to visually discriminate that the lottery content is different from the “touch” dedicated marker MK1.

  FIG. 78 (E) shows a mode in which a marker MK3 dedicated to “continuous hit!” Appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The marker MK3 dedicated to “Sequential Strike!” Is a mode in which the rose pattern appears continuously while overlapping. In addition, a character indicating that “continuous hitting!” Is instructed as an operation mode on the touch panel 480 is attached to the head portion of the marker. In this way, the player is prompted to hit the touch panel 480 repeatedly. In addition, “applicable range of touch panel 480” is always set for the appearance period of the marker MK3 of “continuous hit!”, And when the touch panel 480 is operated within the effective range, points are given for each operation. It can be acquired.

  FIG. 78 (F) shows a mode in which a marker MK4 dedicated to “slide slide” appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Marker MK4 dedicated to “slide slide” has a letter indicating that “Rubbing!” Is instructed as an operation mode to the touch panel 480 on a rose pattern, and a large zigzag-shaped arrow is directed to the right. Comes with a pattern drawn to extend. In this way, the marker MK4 dedicated to “slide slide” can be determined after seeing that the lottery contents and the like are different from the markers MK1 and MK2 dedicated to “touch” and “rub!”.

  The player operates the touch panel 480 in the operation mode instructed by the character display of each marker at the timing when the markers MK1 to MK4 that are moved and displayed coincide with the marker frame MKW. That is, if the marker MK1 is dedicated to “touch”, a touch operation is performed. If the marker MK2 is dedicated to “rub!”, The touch panel 480 is scraped. If the marker MK3 is dedicated to “continuous hit!” If the marker MK4 dedicated to “slide slide” is continuously touched, the operation of sliding vigorously is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), when the accumulated points reach 30 points at which the task is achieved and the scale of the meter 1401 becomes full, on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, As a display at the time of the big hit, a stop symbol of the decorative pattern at the time of the big hit (a combination of the same decorative symbols, “1” in the example of the effect) is displayed. If the task is not achieved by the end of the music game reach production, the display of the decorative pattern at the time of disconnection as a display at the time of disconnection on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (the decorative pattern that is not the same) Combination) is displayed. However, when the lottery result is a big hit and the problem is not achieved due to the absence of the operation of the touch panel 480, the display at the time of disengagement is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and then the display at the time of the big hit is made. It is supposed to be promoted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the touch panel 480 is poorly performed by increasing the chances of lottery to acquire points or acquiring higher points by lottery as the music game reach production progresses to the latter half. A description has been given of what makes it possible for even a simple player to recover in the latter half of the production and achieve a predetermined task when the lottery result is a big hit. However, as shown in FIG. 74, for the markers other than “continuous hit!”, The most successful range in the effective range of the touch panel 480 is set in the range of 7F, and in the first and second half of the music game reach production. There is no difference in the success range.

  On the other hand, as the progress to the second half of the music game reach production progresses, the operation timing of the touch panel 480 is made milder (the success range for the marker is lengthened), so that the chance of winning a lottery to acquire points is not missed. It may be difficult to cause a difference in skill with a player who is good at 480 operations. Here, the effective range of touch panel 480 in which the success range for the marker is set longer as the music game reach production progresses to the latter half will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (A), for the “touch” marker, the effective range of the touch panel 480 is set to 12 types A1 to A12 so that the marker appears 12 times in the music. The effective ranges of these touch panels 480 include the success ranges of 1 to 5F with respect to A1 to A6, the success ranges of 6 to 10F with respect to A7 to A12, and the order in which each marker appears. It is set to be long.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), for the marker “sequentially hit!”, One type of effective range B1 is set on the touch panel 480 so that this marker appears only once in the music. . The effective range of the touch panel 480 is set to a range of 131F with respect to B1, and the effective range is much longer than other markers. However, the effective range of the touch panel 480 is not divided into “success range” and “failure range”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 79C, for the marker “rub!”, Two types of effective ranges of the touch panel 480, C1 and C2, are set so that the marker appears only twice in the music. ing. In the effective range of these touch panels 480, the success ranges of C1 and C2 are set as 7F and 11F, respectively, and C1 and “touch” appear after the “touch” markers A1 to A6. The success range is longer for C2 that appears after the markers A7 to A12.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 79D, for the “slide slide” marker, the effective range of the touch panel 480 is set to one type of D1 so that this marker appears only once at the end of the music. Yes. In the effective range of the touch panel 480, the success range is set to 15F with respect to D1, and the success range is longer than the markers “touch” and “rub!”.

  Thus, in the music game reach production, the “touch” marker A1 to A6, the “rubbing!” Marker C1, the “touch” marker A7 to A12, the “rubbing!” Marker C2, the “continuous hit!” Marker. B1 appears in the order of the “slide slide” marker D1, and the success range is set to be longer according to the order of appearance except for the marker C1 of “rub!”.

  That is, in the first half of the music game reach production, the success range for the marker is short, and even a player who is good at operating the touch panel 480 has difficulty in matching the operation timing of the touch panel 480 to each success range. It has become difficult to earn points. For this reason, in the first half of the music game reach production, the probability of reaching a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieves the task is extremely low, and the player who is good at operating the touch panel 480 is However, the predetermined problem is set so as not to be achieved early, and the expectation for the achievement of the problem (derivation of jackpot) is maintained until the latter half of the production.

  On the other hand, in the latter half of the music game reach production, even if the player has a long success range for the marker and is poor at the operation of the touch panel 480, it is easy to adjust the operation timing of the touch panel 480 to each success range. Yes. For this reason, in the second half of the music game reach production, it becomes easy to acquire points, and if the lottery result is a big hit, the fixed number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieves the task is reached. Probability is high.

  Therefore, even if the player is poor at the operation of the touch panel 480 and can hardly obtain points in the first half of the music game reach production, the player can recover in the second half of the production and achieve a predetermined problem. When the lottery result is a big hit, the player's efforts to operate the touch panel 480 are rewarded to achieve a predetermined task as much as possible.

  In addition, when performing the music game reach production, in addition to the dedicated markers “touch”, “rub!”, “Continuous hit!”, And “slide slide” appear on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the marker The points to be acquired are determined according to the type, and it can be determined that the contents of the lottery are different, but the success range for the marker (the effective range of the touch panel 480) is not displayed and the success range is not displayed. The player is prevented from recognizing the difference. For this reason, in the first half of the music game reach production, it is particularly difficult to match the operation timing of the touch panel 480 with each successful range, even for a player who is good at the operation of the touch panel 480. However, a special marker such as “touch” appears based on the success range for the marker, and for example, the color or size of the marker is changed depending on the length of the success range. The person may be able to recognize.

  According to the gaming machine of the embodiment, in the music game reach production, each of the dedicated markers “touch”, “rub!”, “Continuous hit!”, And “slide slide” is moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Since the marker is accompanied by characters or arrows indicating that the operation mode to the touch panel 480 is instructed, the player can be made aware of how to operate the touch panel 480. Easy to understand.

  Further, a contact-type input device (touch panel) instructed by operation mode instruction means (dedicated markers for “touch”, “rub!”, “Continuous hit!”, And “slide slide”) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. 480) is provided with multiple types of operation modes, so it is not a monotonous operation of simply hitting an effect button, but rather a two-dimensional contact operation to increase the player's willingness to operate and to prevent boredom It is possible to participate in the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the player operates the contact type input device (touch panel 480) with the operation timing and operation mode specified by the operation mode instruction means, a lottery that can obtain a score based on the type of operation mode instruction means is performed. In addition, since there is an interesting effect that a score effect is performed as to whether or not the acquired score reaches a predetermined score, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, when the score obtained reaches a predetermined score, a privilege is given, so that the player who touched this privilege may play a game with great expectation that it may have won a big hit lottery. Since it is interesting to continue, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Next, in the middle of the music game reach production, it is determined whether the operation of the touch panel 480 is a good player or a poor player, and when it is judged that the player is a poor player, the case where it is judged that the player is a poor player. Will also explain what lowers the difficulty of subsequent productions. In this way, by changing the difficulty level of the music game reach production according to the skill level of the player, it becomes difficult for the difference in the skill level of the player in the production to occur, and even if it is a poor player, the difficulty level of the production It is possible to achieve a predetermined task when the lottery result is a big hit after recovering after the change. Here, in the middle of the music game reach production when each marker is set to appear in the order shown in FIG. 74, the type of marker that is changed when it is determined that the operation of the touch panel 480 is a poor player Will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80, for the period from the start of the music game reach production to the appearance of the “touch” markers A1 to A6 and the appearance of the “rubbing!” Marker C1, the seven occurrences It is determined whether or not the operation of the touch panel 480 has been detected a predetermined number of times (four times in the present embodiment) within the marker success range, that is, the degree of detection of the operation of the touch panel 480 in the success range in the first half of the performance. .

  If the operation of the touch panel 480 is not detected a predetermined number of times or more, it is determined that the operation of the touch panel 480 is a poor player, and the “touch” markers A7 to A12 that are scheduled to appear thereafter (FIG. 74). As shown in FIG. 80 (C), the markers are changed to “rub!” Markers C2 to C7 and appear. That is, when the operation of the touch panel 480 is not detected a predetermined number of times or more, among the data regarding the marker type set at the start of the music game reach effect in step S803 of the effect control process, the marker type after the change determination is related. Reset the data part. Note that the effective range (success range and failure range) of the touch panel 480 is the same before and after the marker type is changed.

  On the other hand, if the operation of the touch panel 480 is detected a predetermined number of times or more, it is determined that the operation of the touch panel 480 is a good player, and the “touch” markers A7 to A12 that are scheduled to appear thereafter (FIG. 74). (See (A)) without changing.

  In the music game reach production, if the operation of the touch panel 480 is not detected a predetermined number of times or more when determining the change, the “touch” markers A7 to A12 are changed so that the “rubbing!” Markers C2 to C7 appear. Is set to That is, after the change of the marker type is determined, when the touch panel 480 is operated in the success range due to the appearance of the markers C2 to C7 of “rub!”, Based on the acquired point determination table (see FIG. 76C), It is possible to obtain higher points by lottery than when the “touch” markers A7 to A12 appear. For this reason, when it is determined that the marker type is changed, the difficulty level of the music game reach production is lower than when it is determined that the marker type is not changed, and if the lottery result is a big hit, a certain number of points that achieve the task ( In this embodiment, the probability of reaching 30 points) is high. Therefore, even if the player is poor at the operation of the touch panel 480 and can hardly acquire points before the marker type change determination, it is possible to recover after the change determination and achieve a predetermined task. When the lottery result is a big hit, the player's efforts to operate the touch panel 480 are rewarded to achieve a predetermined task as much as possible.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80, the degree of detection of the operation of the touch panel 480 within the success range is determined at the timing after the appearance of the “rub!” Marker C1, but the determination timing is not limited thereto. For example, the determination may be made at a plurality of times during execution of the music game reach effect, or may be determined every time a marker appears. At this time, the degree of detection of the operation of the touch panel 480 in the success range is changed every time the judgment is made (for example, the number of setting times that the operation of the touch panel 480 should be detected increases as the second half of the production progresses) )

  In addition, it is determined whether or not the detection level of the operation of the touch panel 480 in the success range is detected a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 4 times) or more, but the player who is poor at the operation of the touch panel 480 It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not there is, for example, whether or not the points acquired by the time of change determination have reached a predetermined number of points (for example, 10 points that have not achieved the task) Also good. In this case, not only the player who is not good at operating the touch panel 480 but also the player who has operated the touch panel 480 a predetermined number of times by the time of the change determination, but unfortunately has not been able to acquire points by lottery. However, it is possible to recover after the change determination and achieve a predetermined problem.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 80, when the operation of the touch panel 480 is not detected a predetermined number of times or more at the time of change determination, a higher point can be obtained by lottery for the marker type after the change determination than before the change determination. Although the marker type is changed to a possible marker type, it is only necessary to change the difficulty level of the music game reach production according to the skill of the player. For example, when the operation of the touch panel 480 is detected a predetermined number of times or more when the change is judged The marker type after the determination may be changed to a marker type that makes it difficult to obtain higher points by lottery than before the change determination. Also in this case, a difference in the skill of the player in the music game reach production is less likely to occur, and only a player who is poor at the operation of the touch panel 480 is not unilaterally disadvantaged.

  Further, as a method of changing the difficulty level of the music game reach production according to the skill of the player, not only the change of the marker type but also, for example, in the acquisition point determination table (see FIG. 76) while maintaining the marker type. For example, changing the lottery content (probability of determining acquisition points). Specifically, if the operation of the touch panel 480 is not detected more than a predetermined number of times at the time of change determination, the probability of acquiring points for each marker type or the probability of acquiring high points is higher than before the change determination. The lottery content may be changed so that

  In addition, the marker that was scheduled to appear before the change determination is increased or decreased after the change determination. Specifically, when the operation of the touch panel 480 is not detected a predetermined number of times or more at the time of the change determination, in addition to appearing the marker that was scheduled to appear before the change determination, the marker that was not scheduled to appear is newly added. It is only necessary to increase the chance of a lottery to earn points by making them appear.

  In addition, the success range set for each marker may be changed while maintaining the marker type. Specifically, when the operation of the touch panel 480 is not detected a predetermined number of times or more at the time of the change determination, the operation timing of the touch panel 480 is set to each success range by making the success range for each marker longer than before the change determination. It is only necessary to make it easy to obtain the points by lottery. The method for changing the difficulty level of the music game reach production may be a combination of these.

  Also in the above case, if it is determined that the difficulty level of the music game reach production is changed, if the lottery result is a big hit, the probability of reaching a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieves the task. Is expensive. Therefore, even if the player is poor at the operation of the touch panel 480 and hardly obtains points before the change determination of the difficulty level of the music game reach production, he / she recovers after the change determination and achieves the predetermined task. If the lottery result is a big hit, the player's efforts to operate the touch panel 480 are rewarded to achieve a predetermined task as much as possible.

[Another embodiment]
Since the player usually operates the handle device 500 with his / her right hand, the player's operation on the touch panel 480 is usually performed with his / her left hand, but “touch”, “rub!”, “Continuous hit!”, “Slide slide” The four types of markers can be divided into markers that are easy to operate (simple) depending on the manner of operation on the touch panel 480, and markers that are difficult to operate and that are difficult to operate.

  In the music game reach production, since the touch panel 480 is operated in the operation mode specified by the marker at the timing when each marker moves on the marker frame MKW, it is also required to match the operation mode and the operation timing. It can be said that the difference in the operability easily depends on the type of marker.

  A marker that is easy to operate is “continuous hit!” (Continuous touches are repeated, and only the effective range is set, and all are within the success range), and then touches at a predetermined operation timing. “Touch”, which is the only operation, is a simple operation.

  The marker that is difficult to operate is an operation of rubbing the touch panel 480 at a predetermined operation timing, and “rubbing!” Is a marker that is more difficult to operate than “touch” because the finger is moved, and the touch panel 480 is counted at a predetermined operation timing. “Slide slide” that slides quickly is the most difficult marker.

  On the other hand, the music game reach effect indicates whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a specific effect (music game reach effect) based on a control command based on the winning determination result output from the main control means (main control board 4100). Therefore, even if it is determined that the music game reach effect is determined, it is determined in advance whether the winning determination result is a big hit or not. Therefore, it can be divided into a music game reach effect when the win determination result is a big hit and a music game reach effect when the win determination result is out of place.

  From such a point of view, it is conceivable to link the operation mode to the touch panel 480 in the music game reach production according to the winning determination result, that is, according to the big hit / loss. For example, in the case where the winning determination result is a big hit, the appearance ratio of “touch” and “continuous hit!”, Which are easy-to-operate markers, is increased as compared with the case where the winning determination result is off. As a result, the number of points acquired by the player in the music game reach production can easily achieve the predetermined task.

  Further, for example, when the winning determination result is out of place, the appearance ratio of “rubbing!” And “slide slide”, which are difficult to operate, is increased as compared with the case where the winning determination result is a big hit. This prevents the predetermined task from being achieved although the number of points acquired by the player in the music game reach production approaches the predetermined task.

  FIG. 75C is a time chart showing the order of appearance of the marker types at the time of big hit, and FIG. 75D is a time chart showing the order of appearance of the marker types at the time of losing. When comparing the first half of the music game reach production at the time of the big hit and the first half of the music game reach production at the time of the big hit, the “touch” markers A1 to A8 and the “rub!” The marker C1 appears at a predetermined interval and has the same effect.

  That is, in the first half of the music game reach production when the big hit is off, many “touch” markers appear, and even if the touch panel 480 is operated in each successful range, it is difficult to obtain high points by lottery. It has become. For this reason, in the first half of the music game reach production, the probability of reaching a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieves the task is extremely low.

  In the first half of the music game reach production at the time of the big hit, “touch” markers A6 to A8, “touch” markers A9 to A10, “rubbing!” Marker C2, “touch” markers A11 to A12, “slide The “slide” marker D1 appears in order, and the operation on the touch panel 480 is somewhat difficult. This makes it difficult to get points.

  On the other hand, in the middle part of the production of the music game reach at the time of losing, after the “Battery!” Marker B1 appears, the “Touch” markers A9 to A10 and the “Rubbing!” Marker C2 appear in order. That is, in the middle part of the production of the music game reach at the time of losing, the player can operate the touch panel 480 several tens of times by the appearance of the “Battery!” Marker B1. Is increasing. However, in the acquisition point determination table at the time of appearance of the “sequential hit!” Marker, there are many determination values for acquisition points lower than the acquisition point determination table at the time of appearance of the “touch” marker (for example, +0 acquisition points than +1). Are set so as not to reach a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) for achieving the task.

  In the second half of the music game reach production at the time of the big hit, a marker B1 of “continuous hit!”, Markers A13 to A15 of “touch”, and a marker B2 of “continuous hit!” Appear in order. For this reason, in the second half of the music game reach production at the time of the big hit, the “Battery!” Marker B1, B2, that is, the marker “Battery!”, Which is an easy-to-operate marker, appears twice. The player can operate several tens of times, increasing the chance of lottery to earn points. When the lottery result is a big hit, by simplifying the operation mode on the touch panel 480, a large number of points are acquired and a predetermined task is achieved as much as possible.

  On the other hand, in the latter half of the production of the music game reach at the time of departure, the “touch” markers A11 to A12, the “slide slide” marker D1, the “touch” marker A13, the “rubbing!” Markers C3 to C4, the “slide” The “slide” marker D2 appears in order. For this reason, in the second half of the production of the music game reach at the time of detachment, the “scrubbing!” Marker, which is difficult to operate, appears twice, and the “slide slide” marker, which is most difficult to operate, appears twice. It is difficult to enter the success range by operating the touch panel 480. Also, the number of acquired points is “+0” in the acquisition point determination table at the time of losing, and is set so as not to reach a certain number of points (30 points in the present embodiment) that achieves the task.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (C) and 75 (D), when the winning determination result is a big hit, compared to the case where the winning determination result is out of place, the markers “touch” and “repetitive strike!” Are simpler operations. The appearance ratio of is large. That is, the marker for “touch” is 15 times for a big hit, 13 times for a miss, and the marker for “continuous hit!” Is 2 for a big hit, and once for a miss. Further, when the winning determination result is out of place, the appearance ratio of “rubbing!” And “slide slide”, which are difficult to operate, is larger than when the winning determination result is a big hit. That is, the “rubbing!” Marker is 2 times at the time of big hit, 4 times at the time of coming off, and the “slide slide” marker is once at the time of big hit and 2 times at the time of coming off.

  For this reason, the number of points that a player acquires in a music game reach production at the time of a big hit is easy to achieve a predetermined problem, while the number of points that a player acquires in a music game reach production at the time of losing Although it approaches a predetermined problem, the predetermined problem is not achieved.

[Operation explanation production]
As described above, with respect to the music game reach effect that performs the score effect as to whether or not the score obtained by the touch operation on the touch panel 480 reaches a predetermined score, and gives a privilege when the score reaches a predetermined score As described above, the touch panel 480 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is separated from the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1400 of the game board 4, and the touch panel 480 simply has a rectangular shape. The player who first experiences this table (gaming machine) is a touch panel 480 or a display device on which something is displayed. The game will proceed without knowing if it is. When music game reach production is started during the game, it is confusing which one is a touch panel, and there is a possibility of missing a touch chance.

  In addition, in the case of an effect configuration that prompts the player to perform a touch operation based on the progress of the game without performing a direct instruction display such as “operating the touch panel”, the player who does not know the effect content can operate the touch panel 480. There is a risk of missing the chance to participate in the player-participation type production, because the content of the production (music game reach production) will be encountered without knowing how to perform the game.

  Therefore, when the player is made aware of the presence of the touch panel 480 and decides to perform the music game reach effect, the operation timing to the touch panel 480 in the music game reach effect and the music game reach effect are started. In order for the player to clearly recognize how to operate, an operation explanation effect is performed.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation explanation effect performed on the liquid crystal display device before the music game reach effect is started. As shown in FIG. 81 (A), when the operation explanation effect is started, the characters “game explanation” are displayed at the upper left of the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the operation unit of the touch panel 480 is displayed at the left center of the display panel. The operation unit image SUS is displayed statically. In addition, a marker frame MKW is displayed at the lower left corner of the display panel, a marker MK1 dedicated to “touch” appears from the lower right side of the display panel, and the marker MK1 faces the marker frame MKW from the right side to the left side of the display panel. To move and display.

  Further, on the right side of the operation unit image SUS, a message MGA indicating that the touch panel 480 is touch-operated corresponding to the “touch” dedicated marker MK1 is displayed. FIG. 81A shows that the message “Touch the touch panel with good timing!” Is displayed as the message MGA indicating that the touch operation is performed.

  When the move-displayed “touch” -dedicated marker MK1 approaches the marker frame MKW, the palm image (large) HND overlaps the operation unit image SUS as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The size of the palm image HND is reduced and changed as indicated by the solid line in FIG. 81A in accordance with the movement display of the “touch” dedicated marker MK1, and the “touch” dedicated marker MK1 is displayed in the marker frame. If it matches MKW, the “touch” dedicated marker MK1 is extinguished, and the palm image (small) HND is displayed. In this way, the operation timing and operation mode for the operation unit of the touch panel 480 are expressed.

  Note that the display color of the operation unit image SUS is changed in accordance with the change in the palm image HND relative to the operation unit image SUS. Specifically, at the beginning of the display, the display color of the operation unit image SUS is displayed in blue, and the palm image (small) HND is displayed in accordance with the “touch” dedicated marker MK1 matching the marker frame MKW. The display color of the operation unit image SUS is switched to pink. In the embodiment, the effect display as described above is performed twice for the marker MK1 dedicated to “touch”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), a marker MK2 dedicated to “rub!” Appears from the lower right side of the display panel, and the marker MK2 is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side of the display panel toward the marker frame MKW. Let On the right side of the operation unit image SUS, a message MGA indicating that the operation of rubbing the touch panel 480 corresponding to the marker MK2 dedicated to “rub!” Is displayed. FIG. 81B shows that the message “Arrow display rubs the touch panel” is displayed as the message MGA indicating the rubbing operation.

  When the move-displayed “rubbed!” Dedicated marker MK2 approaches the marker frame MKW, a palm image (large) HND is displayed with respect to the operation unit image SUS as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. Appearing so as to overlap, the size of the palm image HND is reduced and changed as indicated by a solid line in FIG. 81B in accordance with the movement display of the marker MK2 dedicated to “rub!”.

  Then, when the marker MK2 dedicated to “rubbing!” Matches the marker frame MKW, the marker MK2 dedicated to “rubbing!” Disappears and is displayed as a palm image (small) HND. In FIG. As shown, a palm image (small) HND is moved and displayed in a direction away from the operation unit image SUS. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), it is shown that the palm image (small) HND is moved and displayed obliquely upward to the right.

  Further, the display color of the operation unit image SUS is changed in accordance with the change in the palm image HND relative to the operation unit image SUS. Specifically, the display color of the operation unit image SUS is displayed in blue at the beginning of the display of the marker MK2 dedicated to “rub!”, And the marker MK2 dedicated to “rub!” Matches the marker frame MKW. The palm image (small) HND is displayed and the display color of the operation unit image SUS is switched to pink. While the palm image (small) HND is moved and displayed in a direction away from the operation unit image SUS, the display color of the operation unit image SUS is displayed in pink. This is the end of the operation explanation effect.

  After the operation explanation effect is finished, the display content of the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is switched, and with the start of music and video of “Song A”, a meter 1401 (see FIG. 77) and “ “Miscellaneous!” Is displayed as a mission, and after “READY GO” is displayed, a music game reach production is started.

  As described above, the operation explanation effect represents the operation unit image SUS representing the operation unit of the touch panel 480, the palm image HND, and the operation mode corresponding to the operation timing and the marker type for the operation unit. The message MGA is displayed on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the operation unit image SUS is statically displayed, and then the palm image HND is changed in size relative to the operation unit image SUS. Since the timing and the operation mode are expressed, it is easy to visually recognize that the touch operation by the hand on the operation unit of the touch panel 480 may be performed with the operation timing and the operation mode indicated by the marker.

  Since the display color of the operation unit image SUS is changed in accordance with the change of the palm image HND relative to the operation unit image SUS, the operation timing indicated by the marker and the operation unit of the touch panel 480 are manually changed. Since the timing of performing the contact operation is visually clarified in a display form of a change in display color, it is easy to understand at which operation timing the contact operation should be performed.

  After the palm image HND is changed with respect to the operation unit image SUS, the palm image HND is moved and displayed in a direction away from the operation unit image SUS, thereby expressing the operation timing and operation mode of the operation unit. Therefore, even when the operation mode indicated by the marker is a rubbing operation, it is possible to clearly recognize how to move the hand with respect to the operation timing and the operation mode on the touch panel 480. .

[Non-execution of music game reach production]
In the case of the above-described music game reach production, since the touch panel 480 is operated in the designated operation mode at the timing when each marker has moved on the marker frame, it is also required to match the operation mode and the operation timing. It can be said that a difference in operability is easily caused by an operation on the marker in the instructed operation mode.

  For example, “tapping!” Repeats touching continuously and becomes the simplest operation, and then “touch”, which is an operation that only touches at a predetermined operation timing, becomes a simple operation. On the other hand, “rub!”, Which is an operation of rubbing the touch panel at a predetermined operation timing, is more difficult to operate than “touch” because the finger is moved. Further, “slide slide” in which the touch panel is quickly slid several times at a predetermined operation timing is the most difficult operation.

  In the music game reach production as described above, if the operation mode on the touch panel 480 is diversified, the operation mode with the left hand is complicated accordingly, and some players feel fatigued by the operation with the left hand, and the operation on the touch panel 480 is performed. Is expected to be done with the right hand. In addition, it is expected that a player who is a dominant hand on the right hand and intends to actively participate in the music game production will also use the right hand to operate the touch panel.

  During the performance of the music game, using the right hand to operate the touch panel means that when the handle device 500 is operated with the right hand, the right hand is released from the handle device 500 and the touch panel 480 is operated. As a result, the handle device 500 is not operated. If such a non-operating state occurs frequently, the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the invention described below, in the music game reach production where the player operates the touch panel 480 and participates in the production, the time period during which the handle device 500 is not operated during the production is counted, and the timed period is predetermined. When the period is reached, the music game reach effect by the operation on the touch panel 480 is not performed, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine due to the fact that the handle device 500 is not operated during the effect is suppressed. It relates to the invention.

[Touch switch 516]
The handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game medium stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 605 includes a touch switch 516 for detecting that the player is operating the handle device 500. Has been. Specifically, when the player's hand or finger touches the rotary handle portion, the touch switch 516 detects it.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the detection signal from the touch switch 516 is input to the launch control unit 4120 of the payout control board 1186 via the handle relay terminal plate 194 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 (see FIG. 5). 4120a. The input circuit 4120a is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the touch switch 516.

  When a palm or finger is not touching the rotary handle body, a touch detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing control circuit 4120c as an output of the input circuit 4120a. The touch detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control I / O port 4110b.

  On the other hand, when a palm or finger is touching the rotary handle body, a touch detection signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the firing control circuit 4120c as an output of the input circuit 4120a. The touch detection signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control I / O port 4110b.

  The payout control MPU 4110a generates a touch detection command (size: 1 byte) according to the logic (HI, LOW) of the touch detection signal for each predetermined processing cycle, and sends the generated touch detection command through the main drawer relay board 1107. Transmit to the control board 4100. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the touch detection command transmitted from the payout control MPU 4110a, the main control MPU 4100a shapes the 2-byte size and transmits the shaped touch detection command to the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, 4 ms). every).

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives the touch detection command transmitted from the main control board 4100, it analyzes the touch detection command and determines whether there is a touch and no touch.

[Non-operation period timing processing]
The peripheral control MPU 4140a (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control MPU) operates the handle device 500 based on a touch detection command transmitted from the main control board 4100 based on a detection signal from the touch switch 516 during a music game reach production. Not counting the non-operation period.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU analyzes the control command based on the received winning determination result in the command analysis process of step S601 in the 16 ms steady process of FIG. Then, based on the analyzed control command, it is determined whether or not to perform a music game reach effect. For example, what kind of effect is to be performed is determined based on the variation time according to the control command and the effect mode table. When it is determined to perform the music game reach effect, control is performed so that the music game reach effect is executed in the 16 ms steady process of steps S602 to S606 in FIG. For example, an execution flag for producing a music game reach is set.

  As shown in FIG. 72, if it is determined in step S801 of the music game reach production control process that the execution flag for music game reach production is set (YES), the value of the production process flag fluctuates in step S802. It determines with it being a value according to an effect start process (YES), a music game reach effect setting setting process (step S803) is performed, and the value of an effect process flag is changed into the value according to a process during a change effect (step S804). ).

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a non-operation period timing process performed by the peripheral control MPU during the music game reach production. Note that the non-operation period timing process is a process in the varying effect production process of step S712 shown in FIG. 71 in the effect control process of step S602 executed every 16 ms in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. This is executed as the next process after the music game reach production process in step S806 shown in FIG. In FIG. 72, the non-operation period timing process is described as step S811.

  When the peripheral control MPU starts the non-operation period timing process, it first determines whether or not the touch detection flag is off (step S920). As described above, when the peripheral control MPU receives the control command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the received control command is a touch detection command in the command analysis process of step S601 in the 16 ms steady process of FIG. Analyze if there is. When analyzing that the received control command is a touch detection command, the touch detection flag is set according to the content of the touch detection command. Specifically, when the content of the touch detection command is touch, a value 1 is set to the touch detection flag (ON). On the other hand, when the content of the touch detection command is no touch, a value 0 is set in the touch detection flag (OFF).

  If it is determined in step S920 that the touch detection flag is off, that is, if the handle device 500 is in a non-operating state where it is not operated, it is a time counter that is a counter for measuring the time during which the handle device 500 is in a non-operating state. The counter value is incremented by 1 (step S921), and the process proceeds to step S923.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch detection flag is not off, that is, when the handle device 500 is operated, 0 is set in the time counter (step S922), and the process proceeds to step S923.

  When the processing proceeds to step S923, it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter has reached a predetermined time D (step S923). If the value of the time counter does not reach the predetermined time D, step S923 is determined to be NO, and the non-operation period time measurement subroutine is exited.

  Although it is possible to arbitrarily determine how long the above-mentioned prescribed time D is to be set, as an example, if the presentation time of the music game reach production is 45 seconds, the handle device 500 is not operated. The period is about 2/3 of the production time, which is 30 seconds in this example.

  Since the non-operation period timing process is executed every 16 ms, if the non-operation state with respect to the handle device 500 is continuously detected for a predetermined time D, the value of the time counter is incremented by 1 every 16 ms. Then, the value of the time counter reaches a predetermined time D (30 seconds in this example, count value 1875) determined in advance. In this case, it is determined that step S923 is YES, and it is assumed that the non-operation period has reached the specified time, the non-execution flag is set to 1 (non-execution) (step S924), and the music game reach effect is displayed on the timer. A value corresponding to a period of non-execution state (referred to as an effect non-execution period) is set (step S925), and the non-operation period detection process subroutine is exited.

  On the other hand, when the handle device 500 is operated during the production of the music game reach, the value of the time counter is set to 0. Therefore, the value of the time counter is set to a predetermined time D (30 seconds in this example, The count value 1875) is never reached.

  As described above, when the state in which the right hand is released from the handle device 500 and the touch panel 480 is operated with the right hand during the music game reach effect is over a specified period, 1 is set to the non-execution flag. The non-execution flag is set to 0 (cancel non-execution) as a default value. Even if the non-execution flag is set to 1 during the music game reach production, the currently performed music game reach production is continuously performed until the production time ends.

  In step S925, an effect non-execution period in which the music game reach effect is not executed is set in the timer. It is expected that the player will be replaced by the player. Moreover, it is because it is assumed that some players who are changed look forward to the music game reach production.

  Although how long the above-described performance non-execution period is set can be arbitrarily determined, in this example, the period is generally between 20 minutes and 30 minutes. Note that the timer value set in the timer is 1 every 2 ms in a timer update process (FIG. 84 described later) in a 2 ms steady process (not shown) executed every 2 ms timer interrupt. Subtracted one by one.

  If 1 (non-execution) is set in the non-execution flag, then the music game reach effect is produced based on the control command analysis result transmitted from the main control board 4100 in the command analysis processing of step S601 in FIG. Even if the process for determining whether or not to perform is performed and it is determined to perform the music game reach effect, it is merely determined temporarily in the internal process, and the non-execution flag is set to 1 (non- In response to the setting of “execution”, the effect replacement process described below is performed, so that the music game reach effect by the operation on the touch panel 480 is not performed.

[Production replacement process]
Next, the effect replacement process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a sub-routine for effect replacement processing performed by the peripheral control MPU. It should be noted that the effect replacement process is executed at the end part of the command analysis process as one of the command analysis processes in step S601 of FIG.

  When starting the effect replacement process, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the non-execution flag is 1 (non-execution) (step S610). If it is determined that the non-execution flag is not 1 (non-execution), that is, if step S610 is determined to be NO, the sub-routine of the effect replacement process is exited. In this case, no effect replacement for the music game reach effect is performed.

  If it is determined in step S610 that the non-execution flag is 1 (non-execution), that is, if step S610 is determined to be YES, the process proceeds to step S611, and the execution flag for music game reach effect is cleared to 0. (Do not execute) (step S611). Next, proceeding to step S612, 1 (execution) is set to an execution flag for another effect not using the touch panel 480 as an effect instead of the music game reach effect (step S612). In step S612, the peripheral control MPU exits the effect replacement process, returns to the command analysis process, and ends the command analysis process.

  Another effect that does not use the touch panel 480 instead of the music game reach effect is that the variation time of the decorative pattern is the same time as the music game reach effect, and the effect data for another effect that does not use the touch panel 480 is determined to be a win Another effect data when the result is a big hit and another effect data at the time of losing are prepared and stored in the effect mode table set in the peripheral control ROM 4140b.

  As described above, during the music game reach production, the non-execution flag is set due to the fact that the handle device 500 has not been operated for a predetermined time, which is output from the main control means. When it is determined to perform the music game reach effect based on the control command based on the winning determination result, the execution flag for the music game reach effect is cleared to zero. Also, another effect that does not use the touch panel 480 is selected instead of the music game reach effect.

  As a result of clearing the execution flag for the music game reach effect to 0, in the music game reach effect control process of FIG. 72, it is determined in step S801 that the execution flag is 0 (no execution), that is, step S801 is executed. The determination is NO, and the music game reach effect control process is exited. Therefore, the music game reach production is not performed. Accordingly, by not performing the music game reach effect by operating the touch panel 480, the player does not operate the touch panel 480 by releasing the right hand from the handle device 500, so the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a result of setting 1 (execution) to the execution flag for another effect that does not use the touch panel 480, in the effect control process shown in FIG. 71, the value 1 of the execution flag for another effect and the effect process flag vary. Based on the start value, if the winning determination result is a big hit in the variation effect starting process of step S711, the different effect data at the time of the big hit is read from the effect mode table of the peripheral control ROM 4140b, and the winning determination result If it is off, other effect data at the time of disconnection is read from the effect mode table of the peripheral control ROM 4140b.

  Also, the display of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started, the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the reach (the same symbol), and then the timing during the development to the normal reach effect (music game reach effect) At the same timing as the start timing), another control is started.

  In the effect control process of the next processing cycle, the peripheral control MPU sets 1 (execution) in the execution flag for another effect, and the change in step S712 is based on the effect process flag being a value during the change effect. Another effect that does not use the touch panel 480 is executed by the different effect data read in the effect process.

  Therefore, it is possible to avoid meaningless music game reach production by operation on the touch panel 480, and to make the game entertained by another production without realizing that the music game reach production is not performed by the player. It is possible to deter interest in

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 84A is a flowchart of a timer update process executed as one process of a 2 ms steady process (not shown) executed every 2 ms timer interrupt. The timer value set in the timer is updated by timer update processing executed at a cycle of 2 ms. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the timer value set in the timer is 0 (step S510). If it is determined in step S510 that the timer value is not 0, that is, if step S510 is determined to be NO, the timer value is decremented by 1 (step S511), and the process returns.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S510 that the timer value of the timer set with a value corresponding to the effect non-execution period is 0, that is, if step S510 is determined to be YES, the subtraction in step S511 is performed. Skip processing and return. Thereby, the timer value of the timer is subtracted until the value becomes 0 at a cycle of 2 msec.

[Non-execution state release processing]
FIG. 84 (B) is a flowchart of a non-execution state cancellation process executed as one process of a 2 ms steady process (not shown) executed every 2 ms timer interrupt. When the peripheral control MPU starts the non-execution state canceling process, it determines whether or not the timer has expired (timer value = 0) (step S520). If the timer has not expired, step S520 is determined as NO, and the non-execution state cancellation processing subroutine is exited.

  Hereinafter, the processing routine in which step S520 is determined to be NO is repeated until the timer in which the effect non-execution period is set expires (timer value = 0). Then, when the timer expires, step S520 is determined as YES, and it is determined that the production non-execution period (in this example, 20 minutes to 30 minutes) has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S521 and the non-execution flag is cleared to 0. (Step S521), the non-execution state canceling process is exited.

  As a result of the non-execution flag being cleared to 0, the non-execution state of the music game reach effect is canceled (determined as NO in step S610 in FIG. 83). Thus, when the performance non-execution period elapses from the state where the music game reach effect is switched to non-execution, the state where the music game reach effect is switched to non-execution is canceled.

  As a result, when the player changes from the current player to another player while the music game reach production is in the non-execution state, and the player who has changed looks forward to the music game reach production , If it is decided to perform a music game reach after the non-execution period has elapsed, the music game reach will be returned to be executed, so that the player who has changed will entertain the music game reach It is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest of the changed player.

[Raising / lowering the appearance frequency of specific effects / first embodiment]
The music game reach effect performed using the touch panel 480 has been described above. However, the so-called premier-class effect whose appearance frequency is set to be extremely low is not limited to the player participation type effect performed using the touch panel 480. So, it is a so-called intense heat effect that strongly appeals to the player with the game characteristics of the gaming machine model, and gives the player a strong sense of expectation that he / she has won a big hit in the gaming state It has become. However, in reality, such intense heat effects that should be selling (sales points) of gaming machines are set so that they rarely appear in the gaming machine specifications.

  On the other hand, for a gaming machine equipped with such a new gameability (a music game reach production performed using the touch panel 480 is an example of a specific production), for example, the game player can specify how to play and production contents using a pachinko strategy magazine or the like. You can know. And it is assumed that some players are looking forward to experiencing the premier-class heat production. However, even if the game machine is introduced as a new machine in the amusement hall, the intense heat production is set so that it rarely appears, so no matter how much the player plays, it can encounter the intense heat production. However, there is a risk that the excitement of the game will be lowered with the resentment that it will be disappointing and will not let you play.

Therefore, the invention described below relates to an invention related to a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in the interest of the game due to the low frequency of appearance of specific effects at the beginning of the establishment of the gaming machine.
As an example of the specific effect, the music game reach effect performed using the touch panel 480 described above is used. The effect control means (peripheral control board 4140) of the gaming machine has the date information acquisition means for acquiring the date information and the music game reach effect when the number of days elapsed from the start date has not reached the predetermined number of days. The selected ratio includes an effect mode selection table set higher than the ratio at which the music game reach effect is selected when the number of elapsed days reaches a predetermined number of days.

[RTC control unit]
The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the embodiment includes an external real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) 4192 capable of acquiring year / month / day information / time information as year / month / day information / time information acquisition means. .

  FIG. 85 is a block diagram of the peripheral board 4010 and shows an example in which an RTC is provided on the peripheral board 4010. The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 includes a built-in RTC (not shown). Since the peripheral control board 4140 is not backed up, the power is turned off when the gaming machine is powered off. Therefore, the built-in RTC loses timekeeping information and calendar information during the period when the gaming machine is powered off.

  The RTC 4192 has a clock / calendar function. The clock / calendar function is a function that counts the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. Moreover, you may use what counts to a day of the week as needed.

  The RTC control unit 4190 is provided with an RTC 4192 and a battery 4194 for driving the RTC 4192. By providing the battery 4194, the RTC 4192 does not interrupt the timekeeping and calendar function even when the power supply of a power supply board (not shown) is shut off.

  The battery 4194 may be a primary battery (for example, a button battery), or a rechargeable secondary battery, thereby avoiding the need for a backup power supply and avoiding complicated configuration of the peripheral control board 4140. Can do. The battery 4194 is also used as a backup power source for the RAM 4196.

  By providing the RTC 4192, the gaming machine acquires a function for specifying year / month / day / hour / minute / second (calendar information and time information). That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 reads the time information and date information from the external RTC 4192 when the gaming machine is turned on, and sets it in the built-in RTC of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Thereafter, the time information and date information can be held by the built-in RTC instead of reading the time information and date information from the RTC 4192.

  This eliminates the need to inquire the RTC 4192 for time information and year / month / day information each time when performing using the time information and date / time information. It can be performed, and the processing speed for rendering is prevented from being lowered, and various renderings that have been impossible in the past can be executed.

  Note that year / month / day / hour / minute / second (calendar information and time information) is set in the RTC 4192 when the gaming machine is shipped. In addition, a start date (year / month / day) for calculating the elapsed days is stored in a predetermined area of the peripheral control ROM 4140b. Note that the start date can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the start date can be a date when the game machine is shipped, or a date when the gaming machine is installed in the game hall.

[Direction mode selection table]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an effect mode selection table used when determining whether or not to perform a music game reach effect. The effect mode selection table is set and stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b. There are two types of effects determined by the effect mode selection table, for example, a music game reach effect and another effect that does not use the touch panel 480. Another effect that does not use the touch panel 480 is such that the variation time of the decorative pattern is the same as the music game reach effect.

  The effect mode selection table is selected on the condition that the elapsed days have not reached the predetermined number of days (table A, corresponding to the first effect mode table), and the predetermined number of days that have elapsed. It is divided into those selected on condition that the number of days has been reached (table B, corresponding to the second effect mode table). Although it can be arbitrarily determined how many days the above-mentioned predetermined number of days is used, in this example, it is a period between 30 days (one month) (a period in which a new stand is installed).

  Table A is selected during the period until the number of days elapsed from the start date reaches 30 days. According to Table A, the ratio of selecting the music game reach effect is 90%, and the ratio of selecting another effect is 10%. The appearance frequency of the music game reach production is increased.

  On the other hand, after 30 days have passed since the start date, table B is selected, and according to table B, the proportion of the music game reach effect selected is 5% and the proportion of the other effect selected is 95%. The appearance frequency of music game reach production is considerably low, so that it becomes a premier class.

  As described above, when the number of days elapsed from the start date has not reached the predetermined number of days, the ratio of the music game reach production being selected is 90%, and when the number of days elapsed has reached the predetermined number of days, the music game reach production is performed. The selected ratio is set higher than 5%.

[Specific production decision processing]
Next, the specific effect determination process will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of specific effect determination processing performed by the peripheral control MPU. The specific effect determination process is executed as one of the command analysis processes in step S601 in FIG.

  When starting the specific effect determination process, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the received control command is a command including a specific effect instruction (step S620). If it is determined that the control command is not a command including a specific effect instruction, that is, if it is determined NO in step S620, the subroutine of the specific effect determination process is exited. In this case, the specific effect determination process as to whether or not to perform a substantial music game reach effect is not performed.

  If it is determined in step S620 that the control command is a command including a specific effect instruction, that is, if step S620 is determined to be YES, the process proceeds to step S621, and the value of the effect random number is acquired (step S621). ) The current date information is acquired from the built-in RTC (step S622), and the number of elapsed days is calculated from the start date stored in the predetermined area of the peripheral control ROM 4140b and the acquired date (step S623). For example, when the start date is June 5, 2013 and the current date is June 19, 2013, the number of elapsed days is 15.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the number of elapsed days has reached a predetermined number of days H (step S624). As an example, in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of days is set to a period of 30 days (one month) (period set as a new stand), so that H = 31 and the number of elapsed days is set to a predetermined number of days H set in advance. It is determined whether it is not satisfied.

  When it is determined that the number of elapsed days has not reached the predetermined number of days H (YES in step S624), table A is selected as the effect mode selection table (step S625), and the effect mode is determined by the effect random number and the table A. Is determined (step S626), and the subroutine for the specific effect determination process is exited.

  In this case, the music game reach effect is determined with a probability of 90%, and another effect is determined with a probability of 10%. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the music game reach effect is high during the period from the start date until the predetermined number of days elapses. For this reason, players who are looking forward to knowing the new machine information and experiencing music game reach production are more likely to encounter music game reach production while playing games. When they meet, their expectations are met and their resentment is resolved, and a decrease in the fun of the game can be prevented. That is, by touching the touch panel 480, the player participates in the player participation type production, and the game as a new stand is enjoyed.

  When a music game reach effect is determined, 1 (execution) is set to the execution flag for the music game reach effect, and when another effect is determined, 1 (execution) is set to the execution flag for another effect. Is set. Then, in the effect control process (S602), the effect corresponding to the execution flag is started.

  When it is determined that the number of elapsed days has reached a predetermined number of days H (NO in step S624), table B is selected as the effect mode selection table (step S627), and the effect mode is determined by the effect random number and table B. Determination is made (step S628), and the specific effect determination process subroutine is exited.

  In this case, the music game reach effect is determined with a probability of 5%, and another effect is determined with a probability of 95%. Therefore, after a predetermined number of days (30th and January) have elapsed since the start date, the music game reach production appearance frequency is lowered to the originally set premium class.

  As described above, when the music game reach effect is determined, 1 (execution) is set to the execution flag for the music game reach effect, and when another effect is determined, the execution flag for another effect is set to 1 ( Execution) is set. Then, in the effect control process (S602), the effect corresponding to the execution flag is started.

  In this way, at the initial establishment of a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the low frequency of appearance of specific effects.

[Second Example]
In the second embodiment described below, the elapsed days are calculated based on the date information acquired by the date information acquisition means and the start date stored in advance when the power is turned on. And a predetermined number of days determined in advance, and the first production mode table or the second production mode table is determined according to the comparison result.

[Production mode table determination processing]
Next, the production mode table determination process will be described. FIG. 88 (A) is a flowchart showing a subroutine of effect mode table determination processing performed by the peripheral control MPU when the power is turned on. The effect mode table determination process is executed as one of the initial setting processes in step S501 shown in FIG.

  When the peripheral control MPU starts the production mode table determination process, the peripheral control MPU first acquires the current date information from the built-in RTC in which the date information and time information are set when the power is turned on first (step S630). The elapsed days are calculated from the start date stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 4140b and the acquired date (step S631). For example, when the start date is June 5, 2013 and the current date is June 19, 2013, the number of elapsed days is 15.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the number of elapsed days has reached a predetermined number of days H (step S632). As an example, in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of days is set to a period of 30 days (one month) (period set as a new stand), so that H = 31 and the number of elapsed days is set to a predetermined number of days H set in advance. It is determined whether it is not satisfied.

  When it is determined that the number of elapsed days has not reached the predetermined number of days H set in advance (YES in step S632), the effect mode table is determined as table A (first effect mode table) (step S633), and the effect determination mode table Exit the processing subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of elapsed days has reached a predetermined number of days H (NO in step S632), table B (second effect mode table) is determined as the effect mode table (step S634). Exit the decision processing subroutine.

  Thus, at the time of power-on, the elapsed days are calculated based on the date information acquired by the date information acquisition means and the start date stored in advance, and the calculated elapsed days and a predetermined predetermined number are calculated. When the number of days is compared and determined that the number of elapsed days has not reached the predetermined number of days H, the table A (first effect mode table) is determined as the effect mode table, while the number of elapsed days is determined in advance. When it is determined that the predetermined number of days H has been reached, the table B (second effect mode table) is determined as the effect mode table.

[Production mode determination processing]
Next, the effect mode determination process will be described. FIG. 88 (B) is a flowchart showing a subroutine of effect mode determination processing performed by the peripheral control MPU. The effect mode determination process is executed as one process of the command analysis process in step S601 in FIG.

  When the peripheral control MPU starts the effect mode determination process, it first determines whether or not the received control command is a command including a specific effect instruction (step S640). If it is determined that the control command is not a command including a specific effect instruction, that is, if it is determined NO in step S640, the effect mode determination process subroutine is exited. In this case, the effect mode determination process as to whether or not to perform a substantial music game reach effect is not performed.

  If it is determined in step S640 that the control command is a command including a specific effect instruction, that is, if step S640 is determined to be YES, the process proceeds to step S641, and the value of the effect random number is acquired (step S641). ). Next, the effect mode is determined based on the effect mode table and the effect random number determined by the effect mode table determination process executed when the power is turned on (step S642), and the effect mode determination process subroutine is exited.

  In the effect mode table determination process, when the table A (first effect mode table) is determined, the music game reach effect is determined with a probability of 90%, and another effect is determined with a probability of 10%. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the music game reach effect is high during the period from the start date until the predetermined number of days elapses. For this reason, players who are looking forward to knowing the new machine information and experiencing music game reach production are more likely to encounter music game reach production while playing games. When they meet, their expectations are met and their resentment is resolved, and a decrease in the fun of the game can be prevented.

  Further, when the table B (second effect mode table) is determined in the effect mode table determination process, the music game reach effect is determined with a probability of 5%, and another effect is determined with a probability of 95%. Therefore, after a predetermined number of days (30th and January) have passed since the start date, the music game reach effect is a premier-stage effect that is scheduled to be set with a very low appearance frequency.

[Raising / lowering the appearance frequency of specific effects / second embodiment]
Below, 2nd Embodiment regarding the raising / lowering of the appearance frequency of a specific effect is described. As described above, the player can know how to play and the contents of the effects of the gaming machine equipped with such a new gameability by, for example, a pachinko strategy magazine. If the gaming machine is introduced as a new machine in the game hall, there is a player who plays with an interest to try to hit it. And, among the players who actually played the game, after experiencing the above-mentioned premier-class intense pressure production, if a player who wins a big hit comes out, most of the players become premier-class intense production during the game, The so-called occult that gradually becomes a big hit (high reliability) gradually spreads. Then, it is assumed that some players believe in such an occult and want to experience a premier level of intense production.

  Certainly, in the gaming machine specifications of the newly established gaming machine, it is set to be a big hit with a high probability when the intense heat production is drawn. However, the previous intense heat production is set so that it rarely appears, so no matter how much the player plays the game, he will not encounter the intense pressure production and will not be expected to play, There is a risk that the excitement of gaming will be reduced. On the other hand, the amusement hall side should have introduced a new game machine in anticipation of availability. However, because of the low appearance frequency of the intense heat production, the anxiety that the operating rate of the gaming machine will decline if the player's interest in the newly installed gaming machine is diminished. There is a risk that.

  Therefore, the invention according to the second embodiment relating to the increase and decrease of the appearance frequency of the specific effects described below relates to the gaming machine that suppresses the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine due to the low frequency of appearance of the effects. Relates to the invention.

  The effect control means (peripheral control board 4140) of the gaming machine is set and stored with date information acquisition means for acquiring date information and a plurality of effects corresponding to each type of variation pattern according to the control command. Determining whether the date or period based on the first production mode table and the second production mode table and the year / month / day information acquired by the date / time information acquisition unit satisfies the preset condition stored; When it is determined that the date or period does not satisfy the set condition, the first effect mode table is determined, while when it is determined that the date or period satisfies the set condition, the second effect mode table is determined. Production mode table determination means. The first effect mode table and the second effect mode table are set and stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b.

[Direction mode table]
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a first effect mode selection table (hereinafter referred to as table C) used when determining the effect during the period until the date or period satisfies the set condition. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a second effect mode selection table (hereinafter referred to as table D) used when determining the effect after the date or period satisfies the set condition.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the table C, the variation pattern (decoration time of the decoration symbol) corresponding to the control command (variation pattern command) based on the winning determination result output from the main control means (main control board 4100) is displayed. A plurality of effects corresponding to each type are set and stored. Specifically, in the gaming machine of this example, 100 types of variation patterns are provided for decorative symbols. Fluctuation pattern numbers 1 to 50 are set as a variation pattern when the winning determination result is a big hit, and variation patterns numbers 51 to 100 are set as a variation pattern when the winning determination result is out of place. Therefore, the types of effects when the winning determination result is a big hit can be divided into 50 types, and the types of effects when the winning determination result is out of place.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the table C, when the fluctuation patterns of number 5 and number 50 are designated, a music game reach effect (an example of a specific effect) in the case of a big hit is executed. Yes. Further, when the fluctuation patterns of number 55 and number 90 are designated, the music game reach effect in the case of being out of play is executed.

  In Table C, the ratio of the music game reach effect (specific effect) among the 100 types of effects is 4/100, that is, 4%. Also, in Table C, the number of music game reach productions in the case of a big hit is 2, the number of music game reach productions in the case of a loss is 2, and two of the total 4 are big hits. When the music game reach effect is executed using the table C, the degree of expectation for the big hit in the winning determination result is 2/4, that is, the degree of expectation is 50%. In Table C, another effect and another reach effect (an effect in which the decorative symbol is a reach) means an effect that does not use the touch panel 480.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the table D, the variation pattern (decoration time of the decoration symbol) corresponding to the control command (variation pattern command) based on the winning determination result output from the main control means (main control board 4100) is displayed. A plurality of effects corresponding to each type are set and stored. Specifically, like the table C, 100 types of variation patterns are provided for the decorative symbols. Tables C and D in which the numbers of the variation patterns are the same are the decorative symbol variation times, that is, the production time.

  In the table D, fluctuation pattern numbers 1 to 50 are set as fluctuation patterns when the winning determination result is a big hit, and fluctuation patterns numbers 51 to 100 are set as fluctuation patterns when the winning determination result is out of place. Yes. Therefore, the types of effects when the winning determination result is a big hit can be divided into 50 types, and the types of effects when the winning determination result is out of place.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the table D, when the variation patterns of the numbers 5 and 50 are designated, the music game reach effect in the case of a big hit is executed. The effect corresponding to the variation pattern when the winning determination result is a big hit is exactly the same as that of the table C. The difference between Table C and Table D is the number of music game reach effects in the case of divergence. In Table D, fluctuation patterns of No. 55 to No. 59, No. 76 to No. 79, and No. 90 are designated. In such a case, a music game reach effect in the case of being out of play is executed. In this way, when the effect mode table is changed from the table C to the table D, the variation pattern type (number) itself is the same and does not change, but the variation pattern in which the effect according to reach when it is out of place is performed, It is replaced with a variation pattern that performs music game reach production when it is out, and the percentage of music game reach production when it is out increases

  In table D, the ratio of the music game reach effect (specific effect) among all the 100 types of effects is 12/100, that is, 12%. Also, in Table D, the number of music game reach effects in the case of a big hit is 2, the number of music game reach effects in the case of a loss is 10, and two of the total 12 are big hits. When the music game reach effect is executed using the table D, the degree of expectation for the big hit in the winning determination result is 2/12, that is, the degree of expectation is 16.7%. In Table D, the different effects and the reach-specific effects mean effects that do not use the touch panel 480.

  Comparing table C and table D, the proportion of music game reach effects included in all effects in table C (first effect mode table) is the music game out of all effects in table D (second effect mode table). It is set lower than the ratio that includes reach production.

  In addition, in the case where the music game reach effect is executed using the table D, the expectation degree for the winning in the determination result is lower than in the case where the music game reach effect is executed using the table C. ing.

[Production mode table determination processing]
Next, the production mode table determination process will be described. FIG. 91A is a flowchart showing a subroutine of effect mode table determination processing performed by the peripheral control MPU when the power is turned on. The effect mode table determination process is executed as one of the initial setting processes in step S501 shown in FIG.

  When the peripheral control MPU starts the effect mode table determination processing, first, the current date information is acquired from the built-in RTC in which the date information and time information are set when the power is turned on first (step S650), and the peripheral control is performed. The elapsed days are calculated from the start date stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 4140b and the acquired date (step S651). For example, when the start date is June 5, 2013 and the current date is June 19, 2013, the number of elapsed days is 15.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the number of elapsed days has reached a predetermined number of days H (step S652). As an example, in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of days is set to a period of 30 days (one month) (period set as a new stand), so that H = 31 and the number of elapsed days is set to a predetermined number of days H set in advance. It is determined whether it is not satisfied.

  When it is determined that the number of elapsed days has not reached the predetermined number of days H set in advance (YES in step S652), table C (first effect mode table) is determined as the effect mode table (step S653), and the effect determination mode table Exit the processing subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of elapsed days has reached a predetermined number of days H (NO in step S652), table D (second effect mode table) is determined as the effect mode table (step S654). Exit the decision processing subroutine.

  Thus, at the time of power-on, the elapsed days are calculated based on the date information acquired by the date information acquisition means and the start date stored in advance, and the calculated elapsed days and a predetermined predetermined number are calculated. When the number of days is compared and determined that the number of elapsed days has not reached the predetermined number of days H, the table C (first effect mode table) is determined as the effect mode table, while the number of elapsed days is determined in advance. When it is determined that the predetermined number of days H has been reached, the table D (second effect mode table) is determined as the effect mode table.

[Production mode determination processing]
Next, the effect mode determination process will be described. FIG. 91 (B) is a flowchart showing a subroutine of effect mode determination processing performed by the peripheral control MPU. The effect mode determination process is executed as one process of the command analysis process in step S601 in FIG.

  When the peripheral control MPU starts the effect mode determination process, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the received control command is a variation pattern command (step S660). If it is determined that the control command is not a variation pattern command, that is, if step S660 is determined to be NO, the subroutine of the effect mode determination process is exited. In this case, an effect mode determination process is not performed as to whether or not a substantial effect is to be performed.

  If it is determined in step S660 that the control command is a variation pattern command, that is, if step S660 is determined to be YES, the process proceeds to step S661 and is determined by the effect mode table determination process executed at power-on. The effect mode is determined from the effect mode table and the variation pattern (step S661), and the subroutine of the effect mode determination process is exited.

  For example, when the production mode table is determined as the table C and the variation pattern command is the variation pattern of number 50, it is determined as the music game reach production in the case of a big hit. Further, for example, when the production mode table is determined as the table C and the variation pattern command is the variation pattern of number 55, it is determined as the music game reach production in the case of losing.

  Further, for example, when the production mode table is determined as the table D and the variation pattern command is the variation pattern of number 77, it is determined as the music game reach production in the case of losing.

  When a music game reach effect is determined, 1 (execution) is set to the execution flag for the music game reach effect, and when another effect is determined, 1 (execution) is set to the execution flag for another effect. Is set. Then, in the effect control process (S602), the effect corresponding to the execution flag is started.

  If the table C (first effect mode table) is determined in the effect mode table determination process, the music game reach effect is 4% of all effects. Therefore, during the period from the start date to the elapse of the predetermined number of days, the appearance frequency of the music game reach effect is low and it is a premier class. In the period using the table C, the appearance rate of the music game reach effect is low, but when the music game reach effect is executed, the expectation with respect to the winning in the determination result of the winning is as high as 50%.

  If the gaming machine is introduced as a new machine in the game hall, there is a player who plays with an interest to try to hit it. Then, after experiencing the above-mentioned premier-class intense pressure production among the players who actually played the game, if a player who wins a big hit comes out, it will be a win for most cases when it comes to music game reach production The so-called occult (high reliability) gradually spreads, and when that happens, some players believe in such occult and want to experience music game reach production. For one month from the beginning of the new establishment, it will be the premier class that is scheduled to be set, with a very low appearance frequency of music game reach production.

  When one month has passed since the beginning of the new establishment, the period using the table C shifts to the period using the table D. Then, the appearance rate of music game reach production rises to 12%. This makes it possible to meet the interests of players who believe in occultism and want to experience music game reach production, and to play games with motivation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing. On the other hand, when the music game reach effect is executed, the expectation level for the winning in the winning determination result is set as low as 16.7%. There is no loss on the side.

[Second Embodiment]
In the embodiment described above, the start date (year) for setting the year / month / day / hour / minute / second (calendar information and time information) to the RTC 4192 and calculating the number of elapsed days when the gaming machine is shipped. (Month / day) is stored in the predetermined area of the peripheral control ROM 4140b, but the scheduled date (set date) to be changed from the table C to the table D may be directly set and stored instead of the start date. For example, if the shipping date of the gaming machine is June 1, 2013, the setting date is July 1, 2013, which is the date one month later.

  FIG. 92A is a flowchart showing a subroutine of effect mode table determination processing performed by the peripheral control MPU in the second embodiment when the power is turned on, and FIG. 92B shows a subroutine of effect mode determination processing performed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart to show.

  When the peripheral control MPU starts the production mode table determination process, the peripheral control MPU first acquires the current date information from the built-in RTC in which the date information and time information are set when the power is turned on first (step S6501). Next, the peripheral control MPU compares the set date stored in the predetermined area of the peripheral control ROM 4140b with the acquired date, and determines whether or not the acquired date satisfies the set date (step) S6502).

  For example, if the set date is July 1, 2013 and the current date is June 19, 2013, it is determined that the acquired date does not satisfy the set date (step S6502 is set to NO). judge). In this case, the effect mode table is determined as table C (first effect mode table) (step S6503), and the effect determination mode table processing subroutine is exited.

  For example, when the set date is July 1, 2013 and the current date is July 1, 2013, or when the current date is July 3, 2013, the acquired date Determines that the set date is satisfied (YES in step S6502). In this case, table D (second effect mode table) is determined as the effect mode table (step S6504), and the subroutine of effect determination mode table processing is exited.

  In addition, since the effect mode determination process is the same process as FIG. 91 (B) described above, the description is omitted. In addition, the effect mode table determination process of FIG. 92 (A) may be applied to the effect mode table determination process described above with reference to FIG. 88 (A), and will be changed from table A to table B instead of the start date. The date (set date) may be directly set and stored in a predetermined area of the peripheral control ROM 4140b.

[Production with conventional movable objects]
Conventionally, in many gaming machines, as the game progresses, an image is displayed on a display device together with sound and light, and various moving accessories are operated in accordance with the displayed image. This gives the player a sense of expectation and achievement and enhances the fun of the game.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable light-emitting device as a part of a rendering device is rotatably supported on an opening / closing door via a shaft member. As described above, in recent gaming machines, trial and error have been repeated to create a more spectacular production within the limits of the size of the display device and the game board. While the cost of introducing movable accessories increases, differentiation is becoming difficult.

[Moveable directors placed outside the gaming machine]
Therefore, the invention according to the embodiment described below relates to a gaming machine 1 provided with a movable rendering accessory 4200 that is movable away from the gaming machine 1 by rendering control by the peripheral control board 4140 outside the gaming machine. Relates to the invention. For example, a radio control (remote operation using infrared rays) helicopter will be described as an example of the movable effect accessory 4200 of the present embodiment. However, the movable effect accessory 4200 is not limited to a radio control helicopter, and may be an airplane, a sphere, or the like. It may be a flying object.

  FIG. 93 (A) is a side view showing a helicopter as the movable effect accessory 4200 according to the embodiment. The helicopter itself is a commercially available product, and is made of resin. The length in the front-rear direction is 8.2 cm, the width is 8 cm, and the height is 5 cm. In addition, a small motor driven by a rechargeable battery is used as the drive source, and the two upper and lower blades on the top of the aircraft and the propeller on the rear end of the aircraft rotate to fly and have a gyro. Is good.

  The instruction of the flight operation to the helicopter is performed in six ways by three channels of “up / down”, “forward / backward”, “left turn / right turn”. In addition, the helicopter is raised and lowered from a standby place provided outside the gaming machine, or in some cases, the helicopter is turned slightly above the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, a flight is manually performed by jog operation to the control controller provided in the transmitter paired with the helicopter. However, in this embodiment, in order to use the flight operation of the helicopter as an effect (referred to as a flight operation effect) in the gaming machine 1, a data signal instructing the flight operation to the helicopter is transmitted by infrared by the effect control by the peripheral control board 4140. The movable effect actor 4200 is moved away from the gaming machine 1 in accordance with the received data signal.

  FIG. 93 (B) is a block diagram of the peripheral board and the movable effect actor according to this embodiment. The peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 disposed on the peripheral board 4010 is connected to a transmission unit 4210 for infrared transmission of a flight operation instruction to the helicopter as the movable effect accessory 4200. The drive data for the flight can be wirelessly transmitted through the transmission unit 4210 by the control output from the control MPU 4140a.

  The peripheral control ROM 4140b provided in the peripheral control board 4140 stores a plurality of drive schedule data for driving the movable effect actor 4200 over a predetermined time.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of a drive schedule data table in which drive schedule data is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140b. In the present embodiment, the driving schedule data table stores in advance five driving schedule data having different flight operations. These drive schedule data are designated by operation numbers # 1 to # 5.

  As an example, the drive schedule data of operation number # 1 is in the order of operation in the order of operation start, ascent, position maintenance, advance, position maintenance, left turn, position maintenance, retreat, position maintenance, descent, operation stop, end. It is configured. Here, the meaning of each term will be described below.

“Start of operation” starts rotation of the two blades and the propeller.
“Up” moves upward.
“Forward” goes forward.
“Position maintenance” maintains the position and posture in the air.
"Left turn" turns to draw a circle in the direction of the front left hand of the aircraft.
“Retreat” maintains the attitude of the aircraft and proceeds to the rear of the aircraft.
“Down” moves downward.
"Right turn" (not shown) turns to draw a circle in the direction of the front right hand of the aircraft.
“Operation stop” stops the rotational drive of the two blades and the propeller.
“End” means “data end”.

  Further, in this example, five types of operation numbers # 1 to # 5 are selected as flight operation effects at an equal distribution rate of 20%. However, the five types of flight operation effects do not need to be selected at an even distribution rate, and the five types of flight operation effects may be selected at different distribution rates.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating an example of an installation location and an installation state of a movable effect character in a game hall. The outer frame 2 of the gaming machine 1 is attached to the center of the side surface in the longitudinal direction of the island facility 5000 of the game hall, and the gaming machine 1 is installed by attaching the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed as described above. . Above the gaming machine 1, a decorative plate 5001 to which a calling lamp device 5010 is attached is provided, and a curtain plate 5002 for covering a supply basket or the like (not shown) is provided above the decorative plate 5001.

  As an example of the installation location of the movable director 4200 with respect to the gaming machine 1, a mounting shelf 5003 is attached to a curtain plate 5002 corresponding to the upper side of the gaming machine 1, and a storage box 5004 is attached to the mounting shelf 5003. A movable effect combination 4200 is stored in a storage space 5005 formed inside 5004. The storage box 5004 is a box-shaped material made of a transparent material whose inside is visible from the outside, for example, a transparent resin, and includes a lid that can be opened and closed on the upper surface. The storage box 5004 is transparent, and therefore, the player and the surrounding persons can easily see the movable effect accessory 4200 stored therein.

  In the present embodiment, the helicopter as the movable effect accessory 4200 is stored on the inner bottom surface of the storage box 5004. When the drive data for the flight is transmitted from the gaming machine 1 side by infrared rays, the movable effect actor 4200 performs a flight operation in the storage space 5005 according to the drive schedule data described above.

  Thus, only in the storage space 5005 of the storage box 5004, a space in which the movable effect accessory 4200 moves around is secured. Therefore, the movable director 4200 does not collide with the heads of the player and the surrounding people, and safety is ensured.

[Flight operation effect by control of peripheral control MPU 4140a]
Next, the flight operation effect of the movable effect accessory 4200 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a will be described. In the present embodiment, for example, when the main control MPU determines that it is a big hit in the first special symbol stop process (see FIG. 67) (when it is determined YES in step S186), the big hit gaming state is started. A jackpot start command is set to indicate that this is to be done (step S187), and the jackpot start command is output to the peripheral control board 4140 in the information output process of FIG. 54 (b). When the jackpot start command is received by the peripheral control board 4140, the flight operation effect of the movable effect actor 4200 is executed.

[Production mode determination processing]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of effect mode determination processing performed by the peripheral control MPU. The effect mode determination process is executed as one process of the command analysis process in step S601 in FIG.

  When the peripheral control MPU starts the effect mode determination process, it first determines whether or not the received control command is a jackpot start command (step S670). If it is determined that the control command is not a big hit start command, that is, if step S670 is determined to be NO, the processing exits the effect mode determination process subroutine. In this case, the effect mode determination process as to whether or not to perform a substantial flight operation effect is not performed.

  If it is determined in step S670 that the control command is a big hit start command, that is, if step S670 is determined to be YES, the process proceeds to step S671, and the value of the effect random number is acquired (step S671). Next, the operation number of the drive schedule data is determined from the drive schedule data table and the rendering random number (step S672), a pointer is set corresponding to the operation number (step S673), and 0 is set to the operation timer. (Step S674), 1 (execution) is set to the execution flag for the flight effect control process (step S675), and the subroutine of the effect mode determination process is exited. Then, in the effect control process (S602 in FIG. 69), the flight effect control process is started corresponding to the set execution flag.

[Flight production control processing]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of flight effect control processing performed by the peripheral control MPU. The flight effect control process is executed as one of the effect control processes in step S602 in FIG.

  When the peripheral control MPU starts the flight effect control process, it first determines whether or not the execution flag for the flight effect control process is set (step S850). If it is determined in step S850 that the execution flag for the flight effect control process is set (YES in step S850), the process proceeds to step S851, and the timer value set in the operation timer is 0. It is determined whether or not there is (step S851). The timer value set in the operation timer is decremented by 1 every 2 ms in the timer update process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S850 that the execution flag for the flight effect control process is not set (NO in step S850), the flight operation effect is not executed, and the process returns from the flight effect control process. To do. Therefore, the flight operation effect is not performed.

  Immediately after starting the flight effect control process, the timer is set to 0 in step S674 described above. As a result, the peripheral control MPU determines YES in step S851, proceeds to step S852, and reads the drive data specified by the pointer (step S852). For example, when it is determined that the operation number is # 1 in step S672 of the effect mode determination process, the start address of the drive schedule data of the operation number # 1 is set in the pointer in step S673, and “operation” "Start" will be read out.

  In step S853, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the read drive data is “end” (step S853). If the read drive data is not “end” in step S853, step S853 is determined to be NO, and the read drive data is output to the transmission unit 4210. As a result, the movable effect accessory 4200 operates. In this case, since the transmitted drive data is “operation start”, the two blades and the propeller start rotating.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets a timer value (representing the operation time) in the operation timer (step S855), updates the pointer to the next drive data (step S856), and exits the flight effect control process and returns. To do. In this case, as shown in FIG. 94, the pointer is set with an address indicating drive data for “up” as the next operation. The timer value is stored as part of the drive data.

  In the flight effect control process in the next processing cycle, the peripheral control MPU determines that step S850 is YES, determines that step S851 is NO, as a result of the execution flag being set and the timer value being set in the timer. Each process after S852 is skipped, the flight effect control process is exited, and the process returns. Thereafter, until the timer value set in the timer becomes 0, the routine in which step S850 is determined to be YES and step S851 is determined to be NO is repeated.

  When the timer value set in the timer becomes 0, step S851 is determined as YES, and the drive data designated by the pointer is read in step S852. If the read drive data is not “end”, steps S854 to S856 are executed.

  Thus, every time the operation time set in the timer elapses until the “end” drive data is read, the drive data is read, and the read drive data is output from the transmission unit 4210 to the movable effect accessory 4200.

  In the example of the operation number # 1 shown in FIG. 94, from the start of the big hit, the movable effect actor 4200 starts to rotate in the storage space 5005 due to the “operation start”, so that the two blades and the propeller start rotating. To move upward, maintain position and posture in the air by “maintain position”, then move forward by “forward”, maintain position and posture in the air by “maintain position”, and “turn left” , Turn in a circle in the direction of the front left hand of the aircraft, maintain the position and posture in the air by `` maintain position '', maintain the posture of the aircraft by `` retreat '', proceed to the rear of the aircraft, The position and attitude in the air are maintained by “maintain position”, and moved downward by “down” and are placed on the inner bottom surface of the storage box 5004. The flight operation is performed as described above. Then, the “operation stop” stops the rotational drive of the two blades and the propeller.

  Thereafter, when the timer value set in the timer becomes 0, step S851 is determined as YES, and “end” drive data is read in step S852. In step S853, the read drive data is “end”. In other words, step S853 is determined as YES, the execution flag for the flight effect control process is cleared (step S857), and the process exits from the flight effect control process. Note that the flight effect control process ends when the execution flag for the flight effect control process is cleared.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the movable effect actor 4200 moves away from the gaming machine 1 by the effect control by the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the player can experience an unprecedented novel production, and the interest of the player is greatly enhanced. In addition, there is an increased possibility that the surrounding people are interested in the flight operation effect and the game machine is selected.

  In the above-described embodiment, the flight operation effect by the movable effect agent 4200 is triggered by the start of the big hit, but this is not an example, and it is triggered by a change in the gaming state. . For example, in the first type gaming machine, it can be triggered by the occurrence of a specific reach. Moreover, as another example, it may be triggered by a big hit starting to be probable.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention, as described below. Design changes are possible.

  That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is applied to a pachinko gaming machine, but is not limited thereto, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a gaming machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 300 Dish unit 301 Upper plate 302 Lower plate 314 Upper plate upper panel 314d Liquid crystal attachment part 341 Upper plate ball removal touch 340 Upper plate ball removal mechanism 324b Lower dish ball removal Hole 350 Lower dish ball removal mechanism 354 Lower dish ball removal touch 360 Lending unit 365a Ball lending switch 365c Remaining frequency display 365d CR unit lamp 365 Frequency display board 360 Lending unit 361 Lending touch 362 Return touch 363 Lending remaining display part 400 Operation Unit 401 Dial Operation Unit 405 Press Operation Unit 414 Dial Drive Motor 470 Upper Plate Side Liquid Crystal Display Device 480 Touch Panel (Contact Type Input Device)
490 Operation unit light-emitting device 492 Top plate light-emitting device 494 Touch panel light-emitting device 500 Handle device 600 Game panel 601 Front component 605 Game area 1400 Liquid crystal display device 1401 Meter MK1-MK4 Marker MKW Marker frame SUS Operation unit image HND Palm image MGA Message 2100 Attacker unit 2110 Base plate (decorative body)
2113 Base plate lens member (arc-shaped decorative part)
2114 Attacker side decorative board (light emitting means)
2114a LED (light emitting part)
2200 Side decorative member 2202 Main body member (decorative body)
2204 Side lens member 2205 Lower left arc decoration part (arc-shaped decoration part decoration)
2206 Lower left arc decoration board (light emitting means)
2206a LED (light emitting part)
2400 Center object 2403 Front wall (decorative body)
2420 Right arc decoration part (arc-shaped decoration part)
2422 Star-shaped decorative part (conical decorative part)
2430 Right arc decoration board (light emitting means)
2430a LED (light emitting part)
3000 back unit 3000a back front unit 3000b back back unit 3020 back front upper decorative member (decorative body)
3021 Upper arc decoration part (arc-shaped decoration part)
3023 Star decoration (conical decoration)
3024 Upper circular arc decorative substrate (light emitting means)
3024a LED (light emitting part)
3030 Back left front decorative member (decorative body)
3031 Upper left arc decoration part (arc-shaped decoration part)
3034 Star decoration (conical decoration)
3035 Upper left arc decoration board (light emitting means)
3035a LED (light emitting part)
3040 Back front lower decorative member (decorative body)
3041 Lower arc decoration part (arc-shaped decoration part)
3043 Lower arc decoration board (light emitting means)
3043a LED (light emitting part)
3070 Star-shaped decorative member (conical decorative part)
3200 Upper movable decorative body unit 3210 Main unit 3219 Star-shaped decorative portion (conical decorative portion)
3240 Star unit 3248 Star-shaped decorative body (conical decorative part)
4010 Peripheral board 4140 Peripheral control board 4140a Peripheral control MPU
4140b Peripheral control ROM
4140c Sound source IC
4140d sound ROM
4150 Liquid crystal control board 4150a Liquid crystal control MPU
4150b LCD control ROM
4150c VDP
4150d Character ROM
4150e Character RAM
4190 RTC control unit 4192 RTC
4194 battery 4196 RAM
4200 Movable production character 4210 Transmitter 5000 Island equipment 5001 Decoration plate 5002 Curtain plate 5003 Mounting shelf 5004 Storage box 5005 Storage space 5010 Calling lamp device

Claims (1)

A main control board for performing game control and outputting a control command based on a change in game state;
In a gaming machine comprising a peripheral control board that performs presentation control based on the control command output from the main control board,

By the production control by the peripheral control board, provided with a movable production actor that moves away from the gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images